



Class 


Book 

CojpgMll?. 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSm 





> 






\ 


I 



\ > 


p 

> ' 
I 

' » 



V. 


> 


•« 

' V 

:■ •/• 


t 




\ 


$ 


I 

s 


! 


\ 


% 


1 




/ 



/ 



I 





* \ < 


i 


4 





\ . 


\ 



t 


i 


I 


^ . 

I 

V 




The Young Crusaders 


9 








. • » , •' • * * • '■w ^ i« « I > '•‘Jlr *. t '^tlfllr ■ ■ . . * • 1^ • 

t ‘ *' '■ ’ ' ‘I a} ^ 'i ‘■'^r'VT • 

-■f-.-ii- . . ^s. V •■';>■*#»'■■ ■ ' ■ ;';:< 4 ''? .' ■ -=' - ,/ ■ 



^•ir;'■^. .>^<'•, - ’ ■> ^' - 

. '!»yv -i;. ,-' :. 

■> ' .■ ■ ■■" ■*'' - '..." :r; 


'' , 'ic - ■ 

i ■ v'' ^'<‘^ ' * >- -V w * ' ' ' 

L • « a’ '■ ‘ ' ■ " 

:r;v 


T» 


ys Hv 




'•' * 
i 


r>, 

-A*' 


♦' - 




'.X. 



m .^■. ■' - . j * 


'.. . ' ’ *y/**. , ’ - ■ '. 

. ■' .« 


1 


^ 

f 




I , 


( » 


» .i- 



■ 

' i 


I ^ 




t V\ 


✓ 




-. •* ' t 

.: ■:-? 


‘ 1 . 




• - V , 




ll V 




-. ^HDBH > '• 

S-'Viv:. ■■:■' ' -.-^ r'-<- ' y.^ . > 

}m£ *‘ ‘ t ^ ’ 


■m 


* # 


-C-- 

i». 


> • 




". - k * ' 


i i.,V 


» 

Ir * 


. . 'n . i ‘ . 

"■ . 'V-.. '. • ,- 

‘■>-j 'uy':- • •■ '•.^s 


y s 


*%• 

• f?' • ' .h^r 


I I 


V, . 

‘ ' - ' V . • . 



t, 

- . >• . 


( 

r» 


■•' A 


•».>* ■ 

v;‘'r- 


.1 « 


\ 


fr'.^ , * 

. 


' .‘ -•>"* 

. ‘ ^ • ^ * 




V ' 


«.i-' • '• 


» 




*k 


•* 


.f 




V 

; - 4 

' T 


#'• »» J 

w 


'*■ J ' 

. -^r ^ 


c v 


. r > :•" 

'• »'* 'i^ 





. >. 


•- > 


— i 


s • 
« « 


•**»».* 


V 









V -. V. ... . . • i. ^ 

• • J* 1 ^' V' ? ^ V - 




s? 


*1 f 


I 


.• si* ^ _: 

■ ^•'''L.‘}¥^ •'* 

■ ■ ■ , Jr. ^ 


•V 


'■ f’^V, 

7^’* ' 


»T 

c 


I' ^ 


/r 

. >. 




‘V 


• 1 


M 


>'M 


4 






-T 




1^ V 


all t 


' . •• ‘ j ':- :V* 

.f’^ 

ir 


^ • ¥ - * ' ' ' ^ .^pC 7 

'*1 • i *•*.& •* " * • •»*•• ' •. -? 

- - • -' ^ *>,-,' 7 vpjm : - -^tv. : .- : • 

r •" ■^- F._<vCTI r^ W, - ’ ^ 

r . .WMl • '‘li ^ 





M 


^v-> w' 

^ ‘ *! *> .^# 
< • */>••* ^ » 

</ c. <' ' I* <..'^ 


iftr 




v • 


/«_ 




t-V 




• ^ 


* ■• * 


,J»' -w: 

" -...> *7 *' 





THE WHITE TENTS. WHICH UNDER THE GOLDEN MOONLIGHT LOOKED LIKE 

MAGIC TEMPLES RAISED BY FAIRY HANDS” 


^THE YOUNG 
CRUSADERS 

THE STORY OF A 
BOYS’ CAMP 


BY 

GEORGE P. ATWATER 


PARISH PUBLISHERS 
AKRON, OHIO 
1911 



BOOKS BY 

GEORGE P. ATWATER 

The Young 


Crusaders - - 

$1.25 

The Young 


Crusaders in 


Washington - 

$1.25 

(In Preparation) 
r 


PARISH PUBLISHERS 

AKRON, OHIO 




COPYRIGHT, 1911 
BY 

GEORGE P. ATWATER 

©CI,A30ii()42 



TO 

DAVID AND MARY 



CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. OUR BOYS 5 

II. THE MYSTERY 15 

III. THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 24 

IV. THE GLIDER 35 

V. UNDER DISCIPLINE 48 

VI. PREPARING FOR CAMP 60 

VII. ARRIVAL AT CAMP 72 

VIII. A LONG DAY 84 

IX. THE SIGNAL CORPS ; ALSO A 

DISCOVERY 100 

X. VISITORS AND THE SHAM BATTLE 115 

XI. THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 130 

XII. FUN AND FROLIC 140 

XIII. STRAWBERRIES AND 

UNEXPECTED GUESTS 152 

XIV. planning the attack 166 

XV. THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 179 

XVI. A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY AND 

A RESCUE 191 

XVII. A FORCED MARCH 206 

i XVIII. stories ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE... 220 

XIX. THE DISCOVERY AT 

“THE SENTINEL” 237 

XX. EZRA RUSSELL’S TRUST 250 

XXI. A RUNAWAY 260 

XXII. PAT’S REVENGE 272 

XXIII. BUILDING THE MONUMENT 285 

XXIV. breaking camp 296 


h , 



I 


/ ■ 



I 



y > 




t 


% 

r 




, ^ 



1 i 




t 






I 


f 





i 






i 


/ 


/ 


f 


\ ’ I 


\ 



t 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


“THE WHITE TENTS WHICH UNDER THE 
GOLDEN MOONLIGHT LOOKED LIKE MAGIC 

TEMPLES RAISED BY FAIRY HANDS” 

Frontispiece K 

TO FACE PAGB 

“THE WOODED SLOPE ON THE SOUTH CAST 
ITS SHADOW OVER THE CAMP” 74/" 

“THE VISITORS SPENT THE AFTERNOON VERY 
PLEASANTLY” 114 

“ ‘FIRE !’ RINGS OUT THE SHARP COMMAND”. . . . 122 / 

“THE LONG LINE SLOWLY CONVERGES 
TOWARD THE ENEMIES’ AMBUSH”., 128 

“THE CAMP KITCHEN LAY AT THE EDGE OF 
THE WOODED SLOPE” 134 

“THE YOUNG CRUSADERS AT CHURCH” 146 

“THOSE OLD TREES AND HILLSIDES WILL 
ALWAYS SEEM UNLIKE OTHER TREES AND 
HILLSIDES” 164 ' 

“AT THE CALL OF ‘ASSEMBLY’” 210^ 

“THE YOUNG PEOPLE BEGANTO ENJOY ^ 

THEMSELVES” 244 

“VISITOR’S DAY AT ‘CAMP CRUSADER” 252 

“IT WAS NOT LONG BEFORE THE HILLSIDE 
WAS A SCENE OF BUSY ACTIVITY” 286 

“THE MONUMENT OF ‘CAMP CRUSADER’; LONG 
MAY IT STAND TO RECALL THE GLORY OF 
THE DAYS SPENT BENEATH THE PROTECT- 
ING HILLS IN THE QUIET VALLEY” 294 r 



( 




i 

• ' I 


1 

« 





f . . ■ ■ 

/ k 


't . ' ■ ' ■' ' . 

f '.t 

. ■ ■ • ' ,1 . . 


'• l' 



THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

CHAPTER I. 

OUR BOYS. 

A group of boys stood 
beneath the shadow of a 
giant maple tree, in 
front of the High School 
gate. Their books, 
whose fresh bindings 
showed that they had 
not been long used, were 
slung over their shoul- 
ders in narrow straps. A 
heavy rubber nose guard, 
protruding from a coat 
pocket, proclaimed the season of the year as 
fall, the foot ball season. It was the opening 
week of the Portage High School, and the 
leading spirits among the upper classmen were 
deep in the discussion of the activities of the 
coming year. 

“Our team will lack weight this season,” 
said Jimmie Harding, a stocky boy, whose 
broad shoulders and alert manner gave him 



6 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


an air of authority that was respected. “We 
have lost Koons at center and Hanford as 
guard. No one can take their places. Little 
Joe will do wonders behind the line if they 
cannot break through to reach him. And we 
must have more training. It has been too 
lax in past years.” 

“Hilltown will have a strong team this 
year,” spoke up Arthur Miles. “Their best 
men were all juniors and will all be back in 
school.” 

“Portage has never lost a game to Hill- 
town, and we shall not begin now,” said Jim- 
mie in no uncertain tones. “Wc simply must 
make every effort to get a good man at center. 
Have you sized up the freshmen?” 

This question was addressed to a tall, well 
built boy, who had taken no part in the dis- 
cussion, but had listened with the greatest im 
terest. Tom Warren was manager of the 
team, and upon him rested the heaviest burden, 
that of selecting new material. 

“Yes;” was his slow reply, “and I am not 
sure but that we can find a center there.” 

“Who is it?” Half a dozen eager voices 
asked the question, and the group instinctively 
drew a step nearer to the speaker. 

“Have you noticed that fellow who walks in 
from the country each morning? He seems 


OUR BOYS 


7 

somewhat older than the other freshmen, and 
he is large, and no doubt strong. His four- 
mile walk is good training. He might be the 
very man after he learned the game. His 
name is Durr.” 

“I know him,” said Miles. “I was at his 
father’s farm for a day this summer. I saw 
him pitching bundles of wheat, and they 
fairly flew to the top of the loaded wagon. 
He is as strong as an ox and much more spry,” 
he added. ‘^But how about training?” 

“I have had a talk with the new teacher, 
Mr. Kinsman,” said Arthur Miles. “He has 
been out of college but a few years and he 
played on the team. He offered to help if 
we wanted him.” 

All looked at Jimmie. He was the team 
captain, and his approval or disapproval would 
mean much. 

“Of course we want him if he played on 
a college team. He is a pretty good teacher 
and he ought to be able to help whip the new 
hands into shape.” 

It was just at this moment that the High 
School door opened and the man under dis- 
cussion came forth, and started down the walk. 
Mr. Kinsman was a quiet, determined looking 
man, with a genial smile, but a firm demeanor. 
Jimmie hastened to him. 


8 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


“Mr. Kinsman,’’ he said politely, ‘‘the boys 
are talking over the foot ball team. Would 
you be willing to join us for a few minutes?” 

“Of course!” was the cordial reply, and he. 
took his way toward the group. 

For half an hour the discussion went on. 
Mr. Kinsman wisely did not say much, but 
he answered many questions, and gave several 
opinions. He took mental note, likewise, of 
the boys, and their various characteristics. Es- 
pecially did he observe the reserve of Tom 
Warren, who evidently took the responsibility 
of manager very seriously. It was Jimmie 
Harding who displayed the greatest enthusiasm, 
while Art Miles proposed the questions and 
difficulties. Mr. Kinsman had noticed Durr, 
too, and said that he thought that he might 
become, with training, an excellent center rush. 

While the discussion was going on, another 
boy came running from the school, throwing 
his hat into the air. It was Joe Russell, whom 
everyone called Little Joe, the inventive genius 
of the school, irrepressible and good humored. 
Nearly every day he was detained for some 
harmless prank, or some reply that was not 
in the books. He joined the group, slapping 
Jimmie on the back, and not noticing, for a 
moment, the presence of the teacher, he blurted 
out 


OUR BOYS 


9 

“That teacher of geography has no imagina- 
tion. He asked me the largest body of water 
in Maine, and I couldn’t think of Moosehead 
Lake, so I said Havana Harbor. I thought of 
that in ten seconds but he gave me half an 
hour to forget it. Beg pardon, sir,” spying 
Mr. Kinsman, who was smiling. “I didn’t see 
you here,” and Joe was inclined to retire into 
the background. But Mr. Kinsman broke into 
a hearty laugh, and Joe took courage. “It was 
all right,” he continued, “but I could forget 
a great many things in half an hour. It was 
an awful risk for my general information. Two 
hours spent in forgetting would leave me as in- 
nocent as a child,” and Joe made a pathetic 
face that convulsed his friends. 

“Come, Joe,” said Jimmie, “and hear the re- 
sult of our confab. We shall let you into the 
secret that the weakest point on our team is 
quarter-back.” 

As this was Joe’s position, a look of dismay 
crept into his face, and the color began to rise. 

“Oh, pshaw!” was Warren’s quick com- 
ment, on seeing Joe’s evident distress. “Wo 
don’t mean that. Jimmie is trying his clumsy 
wit.” 

“I mean,” said the matter-of-fact Jimmie, 
“that if you are to be kept in every day, you 
will not have time to practice.” 


10 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

‘Then I must be good,” said the satisfied 
Joe. “I will be as good as Tom and write on 
my slate, ‘Little Joe loves his teacher.’ ” 

Mr. Kinsman then interrupted, “How would 
you like to come to my rooms on Friday night 
and talk over the whole situation?” 

For a moment no one spoke. It was a new 
idea to them. No teacher had ever suggested 
that before. But Tom Warren realized the 
value of such a conference, and answered for 
the group. 

“I think, sir, that we should enjoy it very 
much, and I shall be glad to go.” 

The others at once accepted the invitation. 
Mr. Kinsman said, “At half past seven, then, 
on Friday. And now I must go. Goodbye.” 

“Goodbye, sir,” chimed a dozen voices at 
once. 

“He’s all right,” said Harding. “I believe 
he wants our team to do its best. We ought 
to give him a chance to tell us what he knows 
of football. Come on. Art. You have asked 
less than a thousand questions and you ought 
to be hungry. It’s nearly supper time.” 

The group broke up, Harding and Miles 
going together in deep discussion, while War- 
ren and Little Joe started in another direction. 

“Tom,” said Joe. “How would you like to 
take a ride in the clouds?” 


OUR BOYS 


II 


Tom looked at Joe, as if to learn what joke 
he was about to spring. But Joe seemed serious. 

‘What do you mean, Joe?” 

“I mean,” answered Joe, “that I am building 
an airship.” 

“An airship,” said the astonished Tom. 
“Where in the world is it?” 

“I’m assembling it in my uncle’s attic. You 
know his old house? Well, it has the best at- 
tic that ever a house had, and he lets me putter 
about in it. I have been working now for 
two months, and I need help. If you want 
to go in with me, and keep it a secret, we 
may surprise this town some fine day. I am 
the great original bird man of Portage. I in- 
tend to fly over the High School some day 
during the noon recess and startle those old 
fellows who keep me in. My real name is Wil- 
bur Orville Russell,” said the irrepressible Joe, 
dancing upon the sidewalk for a step or two. 

Tom was impressed. “I’ll step over and 
look at your airship if you really have one. 
And I’ll keep your secret, for no one would be- 
lieve me if I told it.” 

“Come right along,” said Joe. “We’ll go 
up there now.” 

The two boys hastened to the fine colonial, 
house, occupied by Colonel Russell, Joe’s uncle. 

Colonel Russell w^as a man who was much 


12 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


respected in Portage both for his character and 
for his ability. 

He was a member of a good family, and 
his home had been occupied by a Russell for 
several generations. The attic to which the boys 
hastened was a very large one and was filled 
with chests and boxes, with furniture of by- 
gone days and with all those relics among 
which youthful curiosity likes to pry. In 
the center of the attic stood a half completed 
arrangement of frames covered with paper and 
fairly bristling with wires and levers. 

Joe at once began to explain. “I have no 
engine yet, but I shall get one if Uncle Rus- 
sell becomes interested. The frames are now 
covered with paper. This is really a model. 
When I have this machine all ready to assem- 
ble, I shall move to the carriage house, get the 
engine and the silk and we shall have it ready 
to fly in no time. What do you think?” 

Tom looked at it judiciously. ‘^Ever hear 
of Darius Green?” he asked at length. 

‘‘Don’t think I have,” said Joe. 

“He was the most famous aviator before the 
Wrights thought of building an airship.” 

“Is that so,” said Joe, “then I’ll call my 
‘plane’ after him. Daniel Green, did you say? 
That’s a good name. I’ll look him up in the 
encyclopedia.” 


OUR BOYS 


13 


Tom laughed. “His name was Darius, not 
Daniel, and you will find him in Trowbridge’s 
poetry. Look him up there.” 

“I’ll do that,” asserted Joe. “Uncle has al- 
most every book of poetry that was ever written. 
He says history tells the things that are so, and 
poetry the things that aren’t so, but ought to 
be. Say, why isn’t this Green fellow in his- 
tory?” 

“You look him up and you will find out,” re- 
plied Tom. “I must not stay now but I will 
come over on Saturday and look at this air- 
ship again. It might fly,” he added, “but you 
surely won’t stand on ceremony and be so polite 
as to insist on my having the first ride?” 

Joe looked at him doubtfully. “No, I’ll take 
a spin or two myself, to see how it goes.” 

The boys soon left the house and went to 
their homes, Joe in deep thought about his air- 
ship and Tom trying to solve the problem of 
the football team. 

Tom Warren was a boy to be counted on. 
Steadily he had developed until many a respon- 
sibility of the kind boys assume rested on his 
shoulders. He had the qualities of a leader; 
self-reliance, good judgment and uprightness. 
His bosom friend, Joe Russell, was a boy whose 
active mind and sturdy body entered into every 
"phase of boy life with joy. His was the creative 


H 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


mind, and his resourcefulness was a marked 
quality of his character. Both were high-mind- 
ed, generous-hearted boys whose friendship was 
deep and abiding. 

The town of Portage was beautifully situated 
on the hills at the head of a great winding val- 
ley. Its people, progressive and cultured, were 
alert to every opportunity for growth and devel- 
opment. The boys of the Portage High School 
were the kind of American boys that welcome 
the chance to act and grow. Mr. Kinsman real- 
ized this, and his plans for the boys sprang from 
a desire to provide by organization that which 
the boys singly or in small groups could not 
attain. He was well content with the start 
he had made. 


THE MYSTERY 


IS 


CHAPTER II. 

MYSTERY. 

Promptly at half past 
seven the members of 
the team who had gath- 
ered at Warren’s home 
near by made their way 
to the house where Mr. 
Kinsman had his rooms. 
He was waiting for them 
on the porch and greeted 
each boy in turn. There 
was a full dozen of them. 
Warren, Harding, Miles 
and Russell were there, of course. There 
was Dick Brewer, a light haired boy, leader 
of the High School Glee Club; Charlie Davis, 
called “Lucky” Davis, because of his unvary- 
ing good fortune; Ted Potter or “Happy” 
Potter, who always seemed in good humor and 
was a peacemaker in many a threatening quar- 
rel ; Leo Inwood, a capable looking boy, who 
had the reputation of doing everything well; 
and a red headed boy, who rejoiced in the name 
of Patrick McGuire. The others were inter- 
ested members of the team. 


THE 



i6 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Mr. Kinsman conducted them to his large 
sitting room where a sufficient number of chairs 
had been arranged. For a few minutes the 
boys sat almost silent, absorbed in their sur- 
roundings. It was a most interesting room. 
Upon one side a large low bookcase occupied 
the space between the windows. It was well 
filled, not alone with the Latin books and arith- 
metics they expected to see in a teacher’s room, 
but with the old favorites of boyhood. ^^Robin- 
son Crusoe” and “The Story of A Bad Boy” 
and “Phaeton Rogers” seemed quite at home 
in their well worn clothes. 

Above the case were many pictures, one of 
an English Cathedral, another of the Roman 
Forum, and still another of St. Mark’s Square 
in Venice, with Mr. Kinsman himself in the 
foreground, feeding the pigeons. This was evi- 
dently an enlarged kodak. A camera rested 
upon the case. In one corner of the room 
was a pair of oars, with beautifully shaped 
spoon blades and long slender looms. Upon 
the wall hung a tennis racket. Pictures of col- 
lege scenes and fraternity groups were upon the 
other walls. It was the room of a man who 
loved games and out door life. 

Pat McGuire was the first to turn his atten- 
tion from the room to their host. 

“Sure, Mr. Kinsman, how did ye find time to 


THE MYSTERY 


17 


do all those things,” pointing to the oars and 
the racket, ‘^and make a teacher of yourself, 
too?” 

Everyone laughed. Pat was an ardent lover 
of sports but not of books. 

‘‘Well, Pat,” answered Mr. Kinsman, “I had 
to do a little studying in winter, in order to 
pass away the time, when I could not row.” 

“But couldn’t ye skate?” asked Pat, so seri- 
ously that everyone laughed again and Mr. 
Kinsman himself most of all. This made the 
boys feel more easy, and every tongue began 
to wag. 

After a minute Mr. Kinsman said: 

“Now, boys, we have some serious matters 
to discuss, and I propose we do it in a business- 
like way. Let Tom Warren be chairman of 
this meeting, and when we speak we must ad- 
dress the chair and be recognized. Here 
is your place, Mr. Chairman,” and he gave up 
his seat before his flat-topped desk. “It is all 
in your hands.” 

No one spoke for a moment as the chairman 
took his place. Then Mr. Kinsman arose saying: 

“Mr. Chairman.” 

“Mr. Kinsman,” responded the chairman, 
politely, “You have the floor, sir.” 

“Gentlemen,” began the teacher, and every 
boy sat up straight at this word. “Our purpose 


1 8 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

in meeting tonight is to discuss the football sit- 
uation. There are several places to be filled 
and we ought to have some regular system of 
training and practice. I propose that each one, 
in turn, give us his views and then, that we 
have a general discussion. After that we may 
ask the manager, Mr. Warren, and the captain, 
Mr. Harding, to draw up a set of rules and pre- 
sent them to the team next Monday. We can 
agree to abide by such rules.” 

The discussion that followed was vigorous 
and to the point. Nine o’clock came before 
they realized it. Mr. Kinsman suggested a 
recess of fifteen minutes and then adjournment. 
All agreed, though mystified by the meaning of 
a recess. It was soon apparent why this was 
done. Excusing himself for a moment, Mr. 
Kinsman left the room, taking Little Joe with 
him. He soon reappeared with a large plate 
of doughnuts and a great pitcher of lemonade. 
Little Joe’s face, covered with smiles, appeared 
behind a tray of glasses. They partook without 
urging. Everyone expressed his thanks, but Pat 
thought some further motion was necessary. 
He arose. Flourishing a glass in one hand and 
clinging to a doughnut with the other, he ad- 
dressed the Chair. 

“Mr. Chairman, and gentlemen, I think we 
ought to pass a vote of thanks to the teacher, 


THE MYSTERY 


19 


for letting us come and litter up his room and 
for providing this special treat. It’s a long time 
since our beloved faculty has recognized that we 
are partly stomach and not all brains. (Ap- 
plause.) To be sure our brains need the most 
exercise as our stomachs have been our con- 
stant concern since we were infants. I move 
we thank Mr. Kinsman by a standing vote.” 

It was done with loud hand clapping. 

‘That’s all right, boys,” said the pleased 
teacher, “you are welcome here any time. And 
now it is time to adjourn. Good-night, and 
good luck to the team.” 

As the boys started for home, Joe Russell 
seized Tom’s arm, and whispered, “Come up 
early tomorrow morning, Tom; I have some- 
thing to show you. It’s great.” 

“Another airship?” asked Tom. 

“No! something better than that. A mystery.” 

“A mystery? Where did you catch it? You 
must be careful. This is not the open season 
for mysteries.” 

“You’ll stop your joking, Tom, when you sec 
this one. It’s a real grown-up mystery, with, 
maybe, something valuable at the end. Will 
you come?” 

“Perhaps I can manage tomorrow morning. 
Good-night, Joe.” 

Slowly Tom made his way to his house. 


20 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


thinking of the evening’s conference. It meant 
much good for the Portage team. Joe’s mys- 
tery then came into his mind. 

“I’ll go and see what it is,” was his deter- 
mination. 

Next morning, after breakfast, Tom went 
to Joe’s home. Joe met him at the gate. 

“Come on to Uncle Russell’s,” was his hasty 
greeting. Joe was evidently full of suppressed 
excitement. He hardly said a word as they 
hurried along the street to his uncle’s home. 
Entering by a side door Joe called out, “We’re 
here,” and, without waiting for a reply, he 
led Tom to the large old attic. 

“Where’s your mystery?” said Tom, looking 
around. “I hope you have him chained.” 

But Joe was too absorbed to be teased. Pie 
went to a curious old chest and lifted the lid. 
A large tin box was in the upper tray. The 
rest of the chest was filled with tools, bits of 
cord and leather, and with all the necessary 
material of a juvenile builder of airships. 

“Uncle let me use this chest and box,” he 
said, lifting the box out of the chest. “I have 
been keeping nails and screws in it. Yesterday 
I found that the box had a false bottom. I 
tried to put a spool of wire in it. It seemed big 
enough, from the outside, but the spool would 
not go in. That is how I discovered it. After 


THE MYSTERY 


21 


a lot of hard work I got the false bottom out 
and I found this big envelope. It has the 
name “Ezra Russell” on it. That was my 
Uncle Ezra who died about ten years ago. I 
have often heard Uncle Russell talk about him. 
I took the box to Uncle Russell, but he was 
not interested, and only said that the attic was 
filled with Uncle Ezra’s belongings, and I was 
welcome to the box and anything in it. So I 
opened this envelope and this is what I found.” 

Tom was all attention by this time. He 
watched Joe pull a piece of yellow paper from 
the envelope. He took it and looked at it. It 
was about six inches long and three inches 
wide. A sketch of a tree, and a group of let- 
ters covered one side. The other side was 
blank. The design was like this: 




(tOit UCLY (flf A « 

i Okblr-K OlClo,^ t&O-jiaaQ 

h^tirt^vb-CL zat f ayba o-r aU 
X bar bcLX Aaa6t i>eit af 
nacLX batf bas (tab€L 


0w 


22 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Tom looked at it a long time. 

“It’s a mystery all right, but any one can 
make a mystery of that sort.” 

“I know that,” said Joe, “but you didn’t know 
Uncle Ezra. I have heard father talk of him 
many times. He was a man who did unusual 
things, but he was a serious man and would 
not draw things of this sort without some pur- 
pose. That means something, and I am going 
to try to find out what it means. This was his 
box for valuable papers. They were removed 
after his death, probably, except this.” 

“What do you think it means,” said Tom. 

“I think that he buried something near a big 
tree and that it was north of the tree. That cir- 
cle is a sort of compass.” 

“That looks reasonable,” admitted Tom, “but 
where is the tree?” 

“The letters below tell us that. They are a 
cryptogram. Do you remember a story about a 
cryptogram in the library? If we could find the 
key, it would be easy as print.” 

Tom studied the letters again. “We can try,” 
he said, “but I confess I do not know how to 
begin. There seem to be a good many a’s and 
b’s.” 

“I am going to the bottom of this if it takes 
all winter,” said the determined Joe. “You 
make a copy and study over it ” Then he 


THE MYSTERY 


23 


added with a smile, “I do not see how I can 
study much between this and our airship. Til 
be kept in worse than ever. But we are on the 
road to riches, Tom. Make that out and it’s 
half yours,” he added generously, as if it were 
a great treasure, all his own and ready to be 
carried off. 

“I am with you,” said the now enthusiastic 
Tom, “and if we make out this thing we’ll go 
to Europe for a year, and then we’ll come back 
and tackle Captain Kidd’s treasure. I must 
leave now, and do some errands for mother, 
ril see you this afternoon.” 


24 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER III. 

THE YOUNG CRUSADERS. 

On Saturday afternoon 
Tom and Joe puzzled 
long over the mysterious 
paper. They gained no 
clue to its meaning how- 
ever. They determined 
not to tell anyone of it, 
at least for the time 
being, but to make every 
effort to guess the key 
to the mysterious writing. 

As time went they thought less about it as 
they^were absorbed in the activities of the High 
School. Every day the faithful football team 
practiced on the school grounds. Mr. Kins- 
man had been appointed coach. The boys 
gained strength and skill under his wise direc- 
tion. Several games were played with other 
teams from neighboring villages. All were 
victories for Portage. The new center rush, 
Durr, proved a tower of strength and Russell, 
Harding, Davis and Miles, behind the line, 
played like a machine. 

The great game, that with Hilltown, was 



THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 25 

played on Thanksgiving Day. It was a strug- 
gle from beginning to end. Neither side 
scored in the first half. Between the halves, 
Mr. Kinsman had an earnest talk with the 
backs. They realized that they must save the 
day for Portage. 

After about ten minutes of play in the second 
half, the ball was within thirty yards of the 
Portage goal. It was Portage’s ball, but the 
situation was threatening as Hilltown was play- 
ing strongly. Time was called frequently, be- 
cause the players were nearly exhausted, and in 
the fierce struggle a boy was often “winded.” 

Durr, at the signal, snapped the ball. Rus- 
sell like a flash handed it to Harding, who made 
a dash around right end. But it was useless. 
Hilltown downed him before he gained a yard. 
But one boy did not rise at once from the 
scrimmage and time was called. It was Rus- 
sell. As he lay on the ground and the others 
bent over him, Davis and Harding slipped 
into their sweaters which the substitutes had 
ready for them. Russell soon recovered and 
play was resumed. But the half-backs did not 
take off their sweaters. 

The signal was again given. Miles, the full- 
back, dropped back as if for a kick. 

Durr snapped the ball, and Joe received it 
skilfully. Instead of passing it to Miles, how- 


26 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


ever, he passed it to Harding, at left half-back. 
Harding ran behind Davis, halted a moment, 
and protected by Joe, who had covered Davis, 
jerked the ball under Davis’ sweater, at the 
small of his back. 

Harding then, with head down, and his arms 
clasped as if he had the ball, bucked the line 
between center and guard. The whole Hill- 
town formation was soon on top of him. In 
the meantime, Davis, his arms free, ran around 
right end and sped down the field. He was the 
fastest man on the team. He cleared the near- 
est boys who did not suspect the trick. The 
Hilltown captain saw the speeding man, and 
saw the bulging sweater. He called to his full- 
back, Dunlap: 

‘‘Stop him. Stop him — he has the ball.” 

It was now a duel between Davis and the 
full-back. Davis went like the wind. Dunlap 
crouching awaited him. As Davis approached 
Dunlap prepared to tackle. His tense form 
was drawn ready for a mighty spring. As 
Dunlap dived at him, Davis halted just a mo- 
ment. Dunlap’s tackle fell short. With a 
great bound, Davis hurdled over Dunlap’s 
body and sped on, making a touch down. 

Excitement reigned among players and spec- 
tators. The crowds went wild with enthusi- 
asm. Hilltown protested the play, but the um- 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


27 

pire ruled that Davis could carry the ball any 
way he preferred. The play stood. 

This demoralized Hilltown and Portage had 
no difficulty in scoring several more touch 
downs, before time was called. 

The great game ended 16 to o in favor of 
Portage and the jubilant boys swarmed to Mr. 
Kinsman and thanked him again and again for 
coaching their team to victory. 

There was a team supper the following 
night. Mr. Kinsman was in the chair, and 
after supper called upon the boys for speeches. 
They responded with great enthusiasm. When 
all had spoken, Mr. Kinsman said: 

“It seems too bad that we should break up 
this good comradeship now that the season is 
over. I have something to propose to you. It 
is that we form a club, which shall hold regu- 
lar meetings during the winter. I am sure 
that I can get permission for us to meet in the 
basement of the school. If this club is a suc- 
cess we might arrange to have a camp next 
summer, near Portage. If you care to do it I 
shall be willing to help.” 

The idea met with instant approval. All 
.were ready to talk at once. The questions be- 
gan to fly thick and fast. How many would 
be in it? What would the club be called? 
What would the members do during the win- 


28 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


ter? Where would the camp be? What of- 
ficers would be needed? 

Finally Tom Warren arose. His level head 
was respected by the boys, and all listened. 

“Mr. Chairman,” Tom began, “I move that 
the Chair appoint a committee of three to con- 
sult with you, and to report plans for the or- 
ganization of a club next Friday night.” 

The motion was seconded by a half dozen. 
Then the loud voice of Pat, ever known in the 
class debates as a ready speaker, was heard 
above the din. 

“Mr. Chairman, I protest. Why should we 
stand on tip-toe of expectation and wait until 
next Friday for ye’s to get together and tell 
us what we want to know sooner? It would 
interfere with the orderly progress of our 
studies, and be like postponing Christmas until 
the Fourth of July. I move to amend, that 
the honorable committee report tomorrow 
night to the long suffering rabble.” 

A chorus of cheers greeted this amendment. 
It was carried, as well as the original motion. 
Mr. Kinsman appointed Warren, Miles and 
Inwood on the committee. They agreed to 
meet Saturday morning, and adjourned. 

On Saturday night the eager boys gathered 
promptly to hear the report. It had been care- 
fully thought out, and Tom read it. 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


29 


“We suggest that we organize a military 
company, under direction of Mr. Kinsman, 
who shall be known as Warden. The officers 
shall be elected by the members and the meet- 
ings shall be once a week. At these meetings 
we shall conduct the usual business of the club, 
and then drill. Any boy oyer thirteen in 
High School may be proposed for member- 
ship, and the members shall vote on his name. 
We ought to get uniforms as soon as possible 
and also plan for a camp. In order to get 
started we propose that we agree to invite fif- 
teen boys to join us and on next Friday have 
a regular meeting with election of officers. 
After that we can plan for future growth.” 

The report was accepted unanimously. Very 
rapidly fifteen new names were proposed. As 
the boys proposed were all well known to the 
group they were elected without difficulty. 
The committee was instructed to notify each 
boy and to prepare for the meeting. 

During the following week little else was 
talked of in the school. Already places for 
camps were suggested, and uniforms discussed. 

When Friday night came a crowd of boys 
waited at the door of the school for Mr. Kins- 
man. When he finally appeared and produced 
the key, which admitted them into the base- 
ment room, there was suppressed excitement. 


30 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


After unlocking the door he stood in the en- 
trance and raised his hand for silence. Every 
boy listened. 

“You have intrusted the committee with 
starting the club,” he said. “Now we wish to 
do things in an orderly way. We shall admit 
one boy at a time, and after he has agreed to 
keep the rules which we may adopt, we shall 
assign him a place, and admit another. Pat 
McGuire will act as guard here, and Inwood 
will conduct the boys. Davis, you will come 
first.” 

When Davis entered the room, with Inwood 
tightly clutching his arm, he was startled. The 
bare room had been transformed. At one end, 
upon a little platform, stood a long table, with 
three chairs back of it. An American flag 
hung upon the wall, back of the chairs. At the 
other end of the room was a large chair with a 
small table. At each side also was a similar 
table and a chair. The remaining chairs 
stretched from the platform, in a diagonal line, 
to the small side tables and then to the one at 
the end, thus forming a diamond. In the 
center was a high desk, with a Bible upon it, 
and two swords. 

Inwood conducted Davis to this central desk, 
and Mr. Kinsman, who sat on the platform, 
asked this question: 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


31 


“Do you, Charles Davis, agree to be loyal 
to this organization?” “I do,” was his reply, 
and he was conducted to a seat in the rows of 
chairs forming the diamond. Each boy in turji 
was brought in by Inwood and each pledged 
himself to loyalty. After all were in, Mr. 
Kinsman said : 

“We will now elect officers for one year. 
You need a Captain, First Lieutenant, Second 
Lieutenant, Third Lieutenant, First Sergeant, 
Standard-bearer, Quarter-master and Bugler. 
We shall need also a Secretary and Treasurer. 
I have paper ready and we shall prepare to 
vote for Captain.” 

The election for Captain proceeded with 
rapidity. Warren and Flarding were nomi- 
nated and Warren was elected. Harding was 
the first to congratulate him. The Captain 
was told that his station was at the right of the 
Warden. Warren took his place and Mr. 
Kinsman placed a gavel in his hands, saying: 

“You are now in charge of the meeting. 
Hereafter you will conduct every meeting of 
our organization.” 

The other elections followed quickly. Hard- 
ing was elected Lieutenant, and took the chair 
at the opposite end of the room from the Cap- 
tain. There was a second chair at this table, 
but it remained unoccupied for the time. As 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


each officer was elected a place was found for 
him. Mr. Kinsman then read the list of of- 


ficers as follows: 

Warden, Mr. Kinsman, 
Captain, Tom Warren, 

1st Lieut., James Harding, 
2nd Lieut, Arthur Miles, 
3rd Lieut., Ted Potter, 

1st Sergeant, Dick Brewer, 


Standard-bearer, Emil Durr, 
Quarter-master, Leo Inwood, 
Bugler, Joe Russell, 
Secretary, Pat McGuire, 
Treasurer, Ralph Underwood. 


This orderly process made a deep impression 
on the boys. It was apparent that it was to 
be a serious organization and was to attain 
results. Mr. Kinsman then made a short ad- 
dress, saying that there was much to be done. 
They must have a name, a Constitution and By 
Laws, and a uniform. There must be a form 
of opening and closing and of initiation. 
They would want new members shortly and 
they must settle the question of dues. All 
could not be done at once, but a good start 
had been made. They must be well drilled, 
too. Here he paused and waited a moment 
before proceeding. 

“I may have overstepped my authority but in 
the interest of the club I have asked the as- 
sistance of a friend, to act as the Second War- 
den of our club and to assist at the drill. He 
fortunately has had much experience and is 
willing to help us. He is already in the build- 
ing, in the office above, and awaits a summons 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


33 


from us. His place is with the First Lieuten- 
ant, in that vacant chair. I suggest that the 
Captain request Lieutenant Harding to go to 
the office and conduct him to his place. 

There was a moment of silence. Then Pat, 
the ever ready, the good natured and popular 
Pat, arose. “Mr. Chairman, or I mean Mr. 
Captain, we have trusted Mr. Kinsman so far, 
and we may trust him now. He has failed to 
mention the gentleman’s name, but I move that 
we welcome him as the Second Warden, even 
though he proves to be our greatest military 
hero, the man who by his writings has brought 
sorrow to the hearts of school boys, Julius 
Caesar. Show us to him.” 

The motion was carried with enthusiastic 
voices. Harding retired and, a few moments 
later, ushered into the room the least expected 
man of all, one known to all the town for his 
ability and generosity, Frank Sumner. 

Frank Sumner had been at a military school 
for many years. He had risen to the highest 
place in the student corps. Later he had 
studied law, and was now practicing in Por- 
tage. He was a man of rare ability in ac- 
complishing his purposes, and many a local en- 
terprise had owed its success to him. His en- 
trance into the basement room of the High 
School, to help a group of boys in their en- 


34 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


deavor to organize their club, was a character- 
istic act. He was greeted with cheers that 
would have startled the ghosts of former teach- 
ers, were they wandering about those halls, 
where they had in their days taught boys to 
whisper and to make no noise. 

The question of the name of the club was 
then discussed. Many names were suggested. 
After they had been considered carefully. Cap- 
tain Warren turned to Mr. Kinsman, saying: 

“We would like you to propose a name.” 

Mr. Kinsman arose. 

“Mr. Chairman, I have given much thought 
to the question of a name. It should express 
the purpose of our organization. We are not 
planning to have good times merely, but to do 
some good. As the Crusaders of old were in 
a holy war, and as their ideal involved the 
upholding of righteousness, the protection of 
the weak, the relief of the poor, so we today 
must stand for the best ideals of boyhood, and 
must prepare to grow into strong men. 

“I propose that we adopt the name ‘The 
Young Crusaders’ and that we take the cross 
as our emblem. Our badges can be a cross 
with the letters Y C on either side of it.” 

This met with instant approval. By a stand- 
ing vote, which was unanimous, the club of 
boys adopted the name “The Young Crusaders.” 


THE GLIDER 


35 


CHAPTER IV. 

THE GLIDER. 

The next morning 
Tom Warren went early 
to Joe Russell’s house. 
It was a clear, frosty 
morning, such as causes 
a boy’s spirits to rise and 
his whole body to crave 
vigorous activity. Tom 
found Joe already in the 
yard impatiently waiting. 

“Come along to Uncle 
Russell’s,” said Joe. “I 
have had a new idea about that airship. I 
have had a talk with Uncle Russell, and he 
does not think I ought to waste money buying 
an engine. In fact he told me he did not want 
his home to be burned down or blown up, and 
I cannot have an engine here.” 

“Not much of an airship without an engine, 
Joe,” remarked Tom. “What will you do 
now? Why not try flying it with kites?” 

“Stop your fooling, Tom,” answered Joe. 
“You will see.” 

The boys, on their arrival, went to the attic 



36 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

as usual. The house seemed otherwise de- 
serted. Joe explained that Uncle Russell had 
gone off for several days and that only one 
servant was about. The airship was not to be 
seen. 

‘Where is it, Joe,” asked Tom, looking 
about. 

“On the roof,” was the cool response. 

Joe led the way to a short ladder, leading to 
a trap door. This he pushed open, and with 
Tom following he stepped out on to a flat por- 
tion of the roof, from which an inclined sec- 
tion sloped to the eaves. Toward the rear the 
slope was long and gradual. Upon the roof 
were the various parts of the airship. The 
paper had been removed from the frames and 
a stout muslin substituted. 

“Tom,” said Joe, “this is no longer an air- 
ship. It is a ‘glider.’ A ‘glider’ is an air 
sailing craft, propelled by gravity. When the 
planes are turned properly it will make a de- 
scent, in a long slant, from an elevated point 
to the ground. If we can get this thing to- 
gether, we can slide down this roof and into 
the yard in great style.” 

Tom stood without speaking for several 
minutes, while Joe began to arrange the scat- 
tered portions of his glider. Finally Tom 
asked : 


THE GLIDER 


37 

‘‘How are you going to get here for a second 
trip, if you live to make one?” 

“I do not intend to come back here. I’ll 
keep the machine in the carriage house, and 
use it from the hill.” 

The hill was a large elevation on the bank 
of the river near Colonel Russell’s. It was 
rather abrupt on the side toward the river, but 
had a long grassy slope on the other side. This 
slope ended sharply, however, and the hill 
dipped into a meadow. 

“Maybe it will do,” said the doubtful Tom. 

All day long the boys worked to assemble 
the scattered parts of the glider. It was a 
bright, crisp, winter day, very mild, and there 
was no snow. When Saturday night came the 
task was about finished and the queer looking 
object, like a great bird, stood upon the roof 
of the house. It was near the edge of a long 
slope, that led toward the yard in the rear of 
the house. A wide, open lawn, stretching to 
the carriage house, was Joe’s proposed land- 
ing place when he should make the descent. 
Joe finally seated himself in the little seat of 
the glider and looked about as proudly as if he 
were sailing around the Statue of Liberty in 
New York harbor. Tom, too, had caught 
the enthusiasm of the moment and his eyes 
spafKleci. 


38 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

The glider had been skilfully made, and as 
it rested upon its little wheels, which Joe had 
taken from a small bicycle, it had an appear- 
ance of gracefulness, as well as strength and 
rigidity. But would it be safe and would it 
fly? 

“It is too late to try it tonight,” said Joe, 
“but I shall make a flight the first thing Mon- 
day morning. Suppose we stay here tomor- 
row night. There is a little bed room off the 
attic and I know Uncle Russell will not ob- 
ject.” 

So it was agreed. On Sunday afternoon the 
boys went to the house, having obtained the 
consent of their parents, prepared to camp out 
in the attic. They brought a lunch with them. 
To pass the hours they tried again and again 
to solve the mystery of Uncle Ezra’s parch- 
ment. They were no nearer a solution than 
when they began. Soon after supper the lone 
servant below said that she was going away 
for the night and cautioned the boys to light 
no matches. 

The evening was passed in reading and in 
discussing the plans for the “glider.” It would, 
be great sport to go rolling down the hill. 
It would be better than coasting for they would 
not have to wait for snow. They hardly real- 
ized that they were alone in the great house. 


THE GLIDER 


39 

At bed time they crept into the little room 
and undressed with no light except from the 
radiance of a clear star-lit sky. 

“This is a pretty lonely place for us,” said 
Joe a little wistfully, as he looked out over the 
roofs of the sleeping town. 

“Go to sleep,” commanded his tired com- 
panion. “You will need your nerve to run the 
glider off that roof.” 

A little after the clock in the church tower 
struck twelve, the restless Joe heard a voice 
close to his ear. 

Make no noise! Wake up!” 
Joe started to call out but Tom firmly placed 
his hand over his mouth. “Be quiet.” 

Joe was now wide awake. He motioned to 
Tom to release his hand and asked in an ex- 
cited whisper, “What is the matter?” 

“Listen,” answered Tom. “I have heard 
some strange sounds. Is the door leading to 
the attic locked?” 

“Yes,” replied Joe, “from this side. What 
have you heard?” 

“It sounded as if someone had raised a win- 
dow below.” 

“Let us look out.” 

Both boys crept to the window. From this 
attic room they commanded a view of the wing 
of the house. Nothing could be seen or heard. 


40 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Then a slight scraping drew their eyes to the 
kitchen window on the ground floor. It was 
in the shadow so they could at first see nothing. 
Soon they distinguished the slight movement 
of a dark object below the window. 

“Burglars,” said Tom in a low whisper. 

Joe’s voice betrayed his excitement as he 
said “What shall we do?” 

In a moment they saw the white muslin 
curtain of the window separate and fall to- 
gether again. This happened a second time. 

“Two have gone in,” said Tom. “How can 
we give the alarm? Where is the telephone?” 

“In the library, but we cannot reach it. We 
cannot get down, either. If we could only get 
Jerry.” 

Jerry was the coachman, who slept in the 
stable. 

“They will go to the front of the house,” 
said Tom. “Put on your clothes and follow 
me.” 

“You are not going down, Tom?” said Joe. 

“No, I am going up.” 

The boys dressed quickly and quietly. 

Tom led the way and crept across the attic 
to the stairway leading to the roof. Joe fol- 
lowed in a daze as to Tom’s intentions. 

“What are you going to do, Tom?” asked 
Joe, as they mounted the stairs. 


411 


THE GLIDER 

Tom answered but one word. 

“The glider.” 

This word acted upon Joe like magic. His 
own airship, the work of his hands, stood there 
ready to do its work. Joe became, in a mo- 
ment, the strong, skilful boy of resources. 
Forgetting the very existence of the men be- 
low, he rushed to the chimney and untied the 
ropes that anchored the glider. 

“I will do it,” he said in a voice of au- 
thority. “I’ll land at the carriage house, and 
wake Jerry. We will telephone from there. 
They can’t get you, Tom, if you stay here.” 

Hapidly he made his preparations. “They 
will not hear nor see, as they have no doubt 
gone into the front of the house. They must 
have known no one was here.” 

Joe got into the seat and tried the levers. 
The dipping planes moved in response to his 
touch. He gave one long look, adjusted the 
planes and said with greatest confidence, “Push 
her off, Tom.” 

Tom hesitated. “I’ll never forgive myself 
if you are killed, Joe.” 

“I’ll get down all right; you push off.” 

The light machine was easily pushed to the 
edge of the long sloping roof. Joe’s face 
could not be clearly seen in the dark, but his 
whole body was tense and alert. Noiselessly 


42 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


the glider, like a phantom bird, rolled down 
over the roof. It was going faster and faster. 
Tom, his heart in his mouth, watched with 
straining eyes. The white planes were clearly 
visible. Now it was at the very edge. The 
glider gave a little convulsive movement, as if 
it would fall, and then Tom saw the dipping 
planes move. Joe had kept his head and his 
nerve. It was not falling. It was going on, 
but more slowly. Had it enough momentum? 
Tom could scarcely believe his eyes when he 
saw the glider make a long leap in the dark- 
ness, on a gentle slant, careening a little to one 
side, and then with a slight shudder, strike the 
ground noiselessly and roll right to the very 
door of the carriage house. It was a success. 
He had forgotten all about the burglars. Now 
it came to him again, as he waited. He saw 
Joe’s dark form against the white of the car- 
riage house, creeping toward the door. The 
door slowly opened, and Tom knew that Joe 
was inside. 

When Joe was spinning down the roof a hun- 
dred thoughts were rushing through his mind. 
It was so far to the ground. It seemed to take 
an hour for the machine to clear the edge. 
Quickly he pulled the lever and the glidei 
rushed him through space with a swinging 
motion that fairly made him shout with ex- 


THE GLIDER 


43 


citement. He could scarcely believe that he 
had done it when the wheels touched the 
smooth lawn, and he was rolled on toward the 
carriage house. 

He never hesitated a moment. Creeping to 
the door, he slipped in and found the sleep- 
ing Jerry in the stable adjoining. Quickly 
they rushed to the telephone, and called up the 
police station. 

An impatient voice said ‘‘Hello.” Joe gath- 
ered himself together and said: 

“There are burglars in Colonel Russell’s 
house. They crawled in a kitchen window. 
There is no one at home, but Tom Warren 
and I were sleeping in the attic and heard 
them.” 

“Who are you?” came the gruff question. 

“I am Joe Russell, Colonel Russell’s 
nephew.” 

“Where are you?” 

“At the stable.” 

“How did you get there?” 

Joe hesitated. If he told all the facts, the 
officer would not believe him. 

“I came down the roof.” 

“Well, we will send a patrolman over to 
look around.” 

This aroused Joe. “See here. There are 
two burglars in that house. If you send one 


44 the young crusaders 

patrolman they will get away. If you do not 
get those men after this warning, my Uncle 
Russell will make it warm for you.” 

‘‘So you think you heard burglars, sonny. 
Better not lie awake nights. I will send a 
man. Meet him at the front gate.” 

Joe hung up the receiver and turned to 
Jerry. 

“Jerry, that officer thinks I am dreaming. 
He is going to send out one man. That means 
that we must capture these men ourselves. You 
meet the patrolman at the gate and hold him 
there. I’ll be back in ten minutes. Those 
burglars will not hurry. They know the house 
is empty. Have you a gun?” 

Jerry, a strapping Irishman, eager for ex- 
citement, stepped to a cupboard and took from 
it a shining revolver. “I am with you, Joe,” 
was all he said. 

Joe ran quickly into a side street and to Mr. 
Kinsman’s house, but a short distance away. 
He threw several pebbles at his windows and 
called his name. Mr. Kinsman appeared at 
the window and Joe hurriedly explained the 
situation. In an incredibly short time, Mr. 
Kinsman was down stairs with a shot gun 
under his arm. 

“Now, Joe; you are the boss; what are we 
to do?” 


THE GLIDER 


45 

“Come to the front gate at Uncle Russell’s 
house.” 

They hurried there and found Jerry and 
the patrolman. The officer was impressed 
by the presence of the armed men and was 
about to return to the police station for more 
help. But Jerry said, “If you go back, Pat 
McConnell, I’ll brand you before this whole 
town as a coward. If two Irishmen and two 
scholars cannot capture a whole flock of bur- 
glars, then we are no good. Come on.” 

“Wait,” said Mr. Kinsman, “Joe, where are 
the valuables?” 

“In the library in a safe.” 

“That is where the burglars are then. Don’t 
you suppose they have a lookout in the 
grounds?” 

“Maybe so,” said the officer, “but more 
likely they have opened the front door and will 
depend upon no one disturbing them.” 

“Then we will try to surprise them. Where 
is the library?” 

“Off the front hall. It has two doors.” 

“Do you know where the light switch is?” 

“Yes, near the door in the hall.” 

“Take oflf your shoes and come on.” 

They did so. Slowly they stole along in 
the shadows to the porch and onto the steps. 
Sure enough, the front door stood open. Mr. 


46 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Kinsman entered first and Joe followed. Jerry 
and the officer, according to instructions hastily 
given, stood just outside the double door, while 
Mr. Kinsman stood by the single door. He 
gave a low whistle and Joe snapped the lights. 
At the same moment they opened both doors. 
Their surmise was correct. Before them were 
two men, crouching before the safe. ‘‘Hands 
up,” shouted all four at once. The blinding 
and unexpected light and the four voices, for 
Joe though unarmed had shouted too, were 
too great a surprise for the burglars. They 
stared for a moment at two revolvers and a 
shot gun and held up their hands. 

It was but an instant’s work for the officer 
to put handcuffs on them and search them. 
Joe hurried to the attic where the impatient 
Tom was waiting and brought him to the 
scene. Then all together they made their way 
to the station. 

When they entered, Joe stepped to the desk 
and said politely, “Here, Mr. Officer, are the 
burglars I saw in my dreams. Will you be 
good enough to lock them up?” 

The astonished officer gave one look, and 
then said: 

“Young man, rest easy about that. You have 
done a good night’s work, all of you. These 
men have been wanted here for some time. 


THE GLIDER 


47 

You may be certain that they will not trouble 
us again for many moons.” 

But Tom and Joe invited themselves to 
spend the rest of the night in the stable with 
Jerry. 


48 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER V. 

UNDER DISCIPLINE. 

The whole town was 
stirred by the story of 
the capture of the bur- 
glars and Joe’s flight in 
his glider. So many 
people came to see the 
machine that Joe feared 
Uncle Russell’s disap- 
proval, so he took it 
apart and carried it to 
the attic again. When 
Uncle Russell came 
home and heard of the episode, he called Joe 
and Tom into his library and gravely invited 
them to sit down. After they had told all the 
details of the adventure, he said: 

‘‘You boys have done me a great service and 
I appreciate it. Joe, what do you call your 
machine?” 

“Darius Green,” answered the unsuspecting 

Joe. 

Uncle Russell laughed heartily. Joe looked 
somewhat embarrassed, and glanced uneasily at 
Tom. 



UNDER DISCIPLINE 


49 


“I suggested the name, sir,” said Tom, 
^^while we were building the glider. I think 
that Joe does not know the poem.” 

Uncle Russell stepped to a book case and 
took down a well worn volume. 

“I think I will read it to him.” 

The Colonel began to read, stopping now 
and then to make comments. 

^‘Darius was a prophet. He predicted the 
time when men would fly. Here are the 
words : 

‘Darius was clearly of the opinion 
That the air is also man’s dominion. 

And that, with paddle or fin or pinion, 
We soon or late 
Shall navigate 

The azure as we now sail the sea.’ 

“He gave his reasons, also,” added the Col- 
onel. “They are not scientific but they show 
a great deal of faith in man: 

“ ‘Birds can fly 
An’ why can’t I? 

Must we give in. 

Says he with a grin, 

’T the bluebird and phoebc 
Are smarter’n we be?’” 

He read how Darius built a great pair of 
wings and jumped off a springboard which he 


50 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


had pushed out of a second story window. 
Darius’ flight was downward; he crashed with 
humiliating promptness to the ground. 

Joe was much interested but he said, looking 
at Tom reproachfully, “You might have hoo- 
dooed me, Tom, by calling that glider Darius 
Green.” 

Uncle Russell closed the book. 

“And now, boys, I wish to do something for 
you in turn. What can I do that would please 
you?” 

Joe hesitated but a moment. “I wish. Uncle 
Russell, that you would permit the Young Cru- 
saders to camp this summer, at the ‘old farm’.” 

The “old farm” was a splendid property of 
several hundred acres, belonging to Uncle Rus- 
sell. It was about ten miles from Portage and 
near the river. It would be an ideal camping 
ground. 

Uncle Russell thought for a few moments 
and then said: 

“That is a very reasonable request and a very 
unselfish one. I am glad to grant it. You may 
use the grove for three weeks at any time in 
the summer you wish.” 

The delighted boys took this news to the 
next meeting of the Young Crusaders and there 
was great rejoicing. The club was steadily 
growing and the boys were drilling with en- 


UNDER DISCIPLINE 


51 


thusiasm. At each meeting, for an hour, Frank 
Sumner instructed the group. The basement 
of the school rang with martial orders, and re- 
sounded with the rhythmical tramp of the feet 
of marching companies. Uniforms had not 
yet been secured, but the style had been de- 
termined. They were to be of khaki and simi- 
lar to the Rough Rider uniform. 

There were now about forty-five boys in the 
club. They were divided into three platoons 
of twelve each. The remainder were officers. 
Rapidly they learned their duties and the tac- 
tics were studied as regularly as arithmetic. 

One night at the meeting there was a quiet 
little stranger. He proved to be a tailor. Each 
boy was measured. Then began the interest in 
getting uniforms. By leaps and bounds the 
funds in the treasury increased as the boys paid 
their assessments. 

One night a long slim package was lying 
on the Secretary’s desk. When it was opened 
it was found to contain bright swords, the 
gift of Mr. Kinsman to the club, for its of- 
ficers. No sooner had they strapped them 
on than two boys entered carrying a larger 
package. This was opened amidst intense 
excitement and a beautiful silk flag was dis- 
closed to view, the gift of Mr. Sumner. 
Speeches were called for, and Pat McGuire 


52 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


paid an eloquent tribute to the generosity of 
the men. 

At last, in March, the uniforms were or- 
dered. They came early in May. What a 
scene of commotion and rejoicing it was when 
the great box was delivered at the High 
School door. A special meeting was called at 
once and the box opened. There they were, 
spotless brown coats and trousers, with laced 
leggings and brown hats. The boys carried 
them home, with instructions to wear them at 
the next meeting. 

Portage began to take notice when on Fri- 
day night from every direction, boys, singly 
and in groups, made their way, in their uni- 
forms, from their homes to the High School. 
Sober citizens smiled and timid old ladies be- 
gan to be nervous, fearing that some unex- 
pected war had broken out. 

Upon assembling, Captain Warren said, 
“We shall dispense with the usual meeting as 
we have an important engagement to keep 
tonight. 

“Company, fall in.” 

Quickly the long line of uniformed warriors 
took their accustomed places. The bright and 
natty uniforms produced such an effect that 
each boy thought himself more the soldier. 


UNDER DISCIPLINE 


S3 

“Right face.” Like a single man they turned. 

“Forward, column right. March.” 

The line moved like clock work. What was 
to happen? The head of the column reached 
the open door and passed out into the school 
yard. 

“Column left. March.” 

Now they were headed for the street. 

“Company halt, left face.” 

At last they were in the street, a group of 
soldiers. How proud they were. 

“Company, attention. We are about to make 
a short march. The strictest obedience to orders 
is enjoined. 

“Right forward, fours right. March!” 

How different the familiar order sounded in 
the open. With alert step the first set of fours 
led by Dick Brewer, moved forward. The 
second and other sets swung to the right, and 
followed the first. The entire company was in 
motion, led by Captain Warren. Each lieu- 
tenant was in place, alongside his platoon. In 
front was Emil Durr, proudly carrying the 
silk flag. 

As the company passed along the streets, pe- 
destrians stopped to look. Small boys gathered 
behind the marching column. When they 
reached the wider section of Main street. Cap- 
tain Warren began a series of manoeuvres that 


54 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


were carried out with perfect accuracy and 
great spirit. 

“Fours left. March.” 

Briskly the fours swung, and marched across 
the street in one long line. 

“Fours right. March.” 

The line broke into fours again, continuing 
on the left side of the street. 

“Right oblique. March.” 

On a long diagonal, they moved to the prop- 
er side of the street. By this time they were 
in the heart of the town and scores of people 
were watching. 

“Left front into line. March. Company 
halt.” 

The first set of fours stopped. With brisk 
movement the second set obliqued to the left, 
and took their places alongside the first set. 
Rapidly in succession the others followed. As 
soon as the line was complete, the command 
came quickly: 

“Right forward, fours right. March.” Again 
they were in a marching column of fours and 
moving on. A great ripple of applause greeted 
this manoeuvre. 

Each boy’s heart thrilled with satisfaction. 
The column entered Laurel Avenue, a stately 
street of beautiful homes. A few minutes later 
the command came suddenly: 


UNDER DISCIPLINE 


SS 


“Column right. March!’’ 

The company swung into a driveway and in 
a moment was drawn up in a long line before 
Colonel Russell’s house. 

Colonel Russell was standing upon his 
porch, evidently awaiting the company. Cap- 
tain Warren stepped forward and saluted with 
his sword. In military fashion the Colonel 
returned the salute by raising his hand to 
his forehead. 

Tom then began: 

“Colonel Russell, I have the honor to pre- 
sent to you this company of Young Crusaders. 
Our errand is a peaceful one. We wish to pay 
you our respects and to show our gratitude to 
you for permitting us to arrange for a camp 
on your farm.” 

The Colonel took a step forward and salut- 
ing again, replied to Tom’s speech. 

“Captain Warren, Mr. Kinsman, Mr. Sum- 
ner, and gentlemen of the Young Crusaders, 
I am very glad to have this opportunity to see 
you. I congratulate you on your splendid ap- 
pearance and the proficiency of your drill. It 
is a privilege to me to be allowed to assist in 
making your summer camp a success. Your 
organization is a worthy one. If I may be 
permitted to say it, you are not to cultivate the 
warlike spirit, but to promote peace among 


56 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

men. But military discipline is valuable, be- 
cause it assists you to be self-reliant, and 
teaches you the value of obedience. In so far 
as you observe that lesson, you will enjoy your 
organization and will benefit from your ex- 
perience in camp. At the same time, you must 
never forget that you must defend that flag 
beneath which you assemble. Peace, as well 
as war, has its struggles, however; the fight to 
maintain the honor of the flag is as much the 
duty of the honorable citizen among his fel- 
lows as it is the duty of the soldier on the battle 
field. The honor of the flag in time of peace is 
not maintained by bullets and powder, but by 
the honesty, purity, chivalry and courage of 
every one who loves his native land and honors 
the stars and stripes. May you learn to be the 
true patriots, who will maintain manly right- 
eousness and learn honorable obedience in the 
days of your youth, and bring honor to the 
emblem of our nation through all your lives. 
And forget not also the great lesson of the 
cross, that you are soldiers of the army of 
God.” 

As the Colonel saluted the flag, a great cheer 
burst from the boys. Joe raised his bugle to 
his lips and sounded the spirited call “To the 
Color.” As the last note sounded, each platoon 
moved in quick time, the first platoon to the 


UNDER DISCIPLINE 


57 


right, the second behind, and the third to the 
left of the color which was raised aloft by 
Durr. They formed thus three sides of a hol- 
low square. The officers at once formed in the 
front, completing the square. It was so quickly 
done and with such precision that the aston- 
ished Colonel clapped his hands with delight. 

The bugle sounded again and the platoons 
resumed their former places. 

‘‘Captain Warren,” said the Colonel, “may 
I take command of your forces?” 

The astonished Tom was equal to the oc- 
casion. Hastily unbuckling his sword, he 
handed it to Colonel Russell, with the words: 

“We surrender.” 

His face glowing with satisfaction. Colonel 
Russell took the sword, and descended the 
steps. 

“Attention, Company. We are about to visit 
the famous spot where Bugler Russell made 
his notable descent in his glider. Right face. 
Forward, March.” 

The column of eager boys moved past the 
house. 

“Column left, March.” 

Alongside the house they went. As the 
column reached the wide stretch of lawn in the 
rear, a sight met their eyes that caused them to 
gasp. A long row of tables was stretched 


58 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

from the kitchen door to the carriage house. 
Above the tables were hung Japanese lanterns. 
Upon the tables were huge plates of sand- 
wiches and cake, and many glasses. But 
strangest of all, behind the tables stood a solid 
phalanx of girls, the sisters and cousins and 
friends of the Young Crusaders. As the boys 
in single rank came into the light of the lan- 
terns the girls began to applaud. The brown 
line, which felt itself capable of withstand- 
ing a charge of cavalry, to such a pitch 
had its ardor been aroused by the Colonel’s 
speech, now wavered in embarrassment before 
the battery of admiring eyes. When the column 
was parallel with the tables, the Colonel com- 
manded ‘‘Halt.” 

“Left face.” This brought upon the line 
the concentrated fire of bright faces reinforced 
by joyous laughter. 

“Attention, Company. Charge.” The Col- 
onel laughed aloud as he gave the order. The 
boys made a short and hesitating rush, and 
brought up sharply at the table. There was a 
moment of indecision, and then their youthful 
spirits rallied to the occasion. Very soon there 
was a great confusion of laughter and conver- 
sation. The delicacies were not forgotten and 
the whole company of boys and girls gave the 
Colonel no reason to believe that his hospi- 


UNDER DISCIPLINE 


59 


tality was not appreciated. Pat McGuire 
vainly tried to make a speech, while Joe was 
the center of a group who begged him to try 
another flight in his glider. Lucky Davis and 
Leo Inwood even agreed to impersonate the 
burglars, if Joe and the others would give an 
encore. Jimmie Harding made an expedition 
to the barn and brought forth the reluctant 
Jerry, much to the delight of the crowd. An 
hour passed rapidly and delightfully. In the 
meantime the parents of the young people had 
come, and watched the scene with greatest in- 
terest. 

Colonel Russell relinquished the command to 
Tom again, and the boys were assembled and 
marched back to their quarters at the High 
School, while the girls and their parents took 
their leave likewise. 

It was an occasion that was long remembered 
among the Young Crusaders, the beginning of 
many happy days for the organization. 


15o THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER VI. 

PREPARING FOR CAMP. 

The days of school 
were now drawing to a 
close. Little Joe had 
been able, by a great ef- 
fort, to prevent his high 
spirits from interfering 
with his recitations and 
he had not been kept in 
so much of late. Mr. 
Kinsman and Mr. Sum- 
ner had been busy with 
the work of the Young 
Crusaders. Another teacher of the school, Mr. 
Jackson, had become interested in the work and 
had been installed as a Warden. He was verv 
welcome as he had a large practical knowledge 
of camps. For several years he had taken 
small parties of boys to a near-by lake. 

It had been decided to go to camp the last 
two weeks of June. The High School would 
close before that time. On the morning of the 
last Friday in May, Joe Russell came to school 
with such an air of exhilaration that Art Miles 
at once noticed it 



PREPARING FOR CAMP 6i 

‘‘Look at Little Joe. Has someone left you 
a fortune, Joe?’’ 

Joe’s only response was to give Art a friendly 
blow on the chest with the back of his hand. 
“Happy Potter” took up the teasing. 

“Did someone do your chores for you, Joe, 
or have you found a horse shoe?” 

Joe turned and said, “You fellows would re- 
joice too if you knew what I know.” 

This was too much for Pat McGuire’s curi- 
osity. 

“Come now, Joseph, me boy, if you know 
anything for the good of humanity, do not re- 
strain it beneath your jacket, but blurt it forth. 
Too much knowledge is a dangerous thing for 
ye. Ye might explode.” 

Joe’s only answer was an indignant look, and 
the remark, “Wait until tonight, at the meet- 
ing.” 

Joe’s good spirits seemed to have spread to 
Mr. Kinsman and Mr. Jackson, for they were 
discovered in jubilant consultation. Even 
Frank Sumner made a trip to the High School 
to see Mr. Kinsman. Captain Warren was evi- 
dently burdened with some secret. But noth- 
ing was made known. 

The meeting that night was charged with an 
air of expectancy, and the boys were not dis- 
appointed. After the routine business the com- 


62 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

pany was formed and Mr. Sumner stepped for- 
ward. 

“I wish to say,” he began slowly, “that you 
are very fortunate young men. There has 
been one thing lacking in our company. 
Through the generosity of Colonel Russell, 
that want has been supplied. Company, right 
face. Forward, March.” 

The mystified boys marched eagerly from the 
room, and much to their amazement, up the 
stairs and into the hall. There they came 
upon their surprise. For in the main corridor, 
neatly arranged in a dozen stacks, were bright 
and glistening rifles. A great cheer resounded, 
and there would have been a wild break for the 
guns, had not the discipline of many a drill 
prevented. There had been a great longing for 
guns, but the funds were not sufficient to pur- 
chase them. 

To each private, a rifle was given, after its 
number had been taken. Each boy was told 
that he would be responsible for the rifle so 
given. No rifle was to be loaded, and if a gun 
were shot, the offender would be dismissed 
from the organization. The rifles for the 
present were for drill only. 

It was a willing group which, that night, re- 
ceived its first instruction in the manual of 
arms. The time for camp was now close at 


PREPARING FOR CAMP 63 

hand, and each boy was eager to do his best. 
Mr. Jackson made the announcement that tents 
had been rented and that, at the next meeting, 
full instructions would be given. No one was 
absent when that meeting was called to order. 

The directions were very minute, and each 
member copied the list of articles needed for 
his personal use at camp. Each boy was to 
bring to the High School, on Monday night, 
the fourteenth of June, a cot, with sufficient 
bedding; a box containing his clothing, soap, 
towels, needles and thread, several candles, a 
hammer or hatchet, a plate, knife, fork, spoons, 
a cup, and a yard and a half of oil cloth. 

Mr. Sumner and Mr. Jackson reported that 
they had employed a cook and had rented a 
stove. They had bought the necessary cooking 
utensils and a sufficient supply of groceries. 
The camp assessment of five dollars a boy, had 
been paid in small amounts during the winter, 
and Ralph Underwood, the Treasurer, was 
well able to meet all necessary expenses. 

The Hospital Corps, in charge of Ted Pot- 
ter, reported itself ready for service. This had 
been formed, at Mr. Sumner’s suggestion, early 
in the winter. Four interested boys made a 
diligent study of Major Pilcher’s book ‘‘First 
Aid to the Injured,” and had prepared a medi- 
cine chest, which contained bandages and anti- 


64 the young crusaders 

septic gauze, adhesive tape and liniments, be- 
sides medicine for minor diseases, and oint- 
ments for possible bites and burns. 

On Monday afternoon, before the start, the 
High School yard was a scene of greatest con- 
fusion. Cots were heaped up until passersby 
were in danger of being buried by a collapse 
of the pyramid. Boxes of all sorts were scat- 
tered about. The camp kitchen with the pine 
boxes filled with groceries, made a distinct sec- 
tion. Among the equipment were several bi- 
cycles. At five o’clock two huge drays drove into 
the yard, and the work of loading began. Many 
hands made light labor. It was not long before 
cots, boxes, stove and utensils were safely stored 
in the capacious drays. The drays were then 
drawn to the barn to remain for the night. 
They would start early in the morning for the 
camp ten miles away. Thus they would reach 
the camp before the company. 

Tuesday morning dawned bright and beauti- 
ful. Orders had been given to the company to 
assemble at eight o’clock. Before seven, boys 
appeared, with guns on their shoulders, and 
their knapsacks bursting with lunches, bounti- 
fully prepared by good mothers. Mr. Kins- 
man, Mr. Sumner and Mr. Jackson were on 
the scene, each with a fresh new khaki uniform. 
The boys were greatly pleased at this and were 


PREPARING FOR CAMP 65 

not slow to express their satisfaction. The com- 
pany formed at eight promptly. Durr proudly 
carried the great silken flag. A rabble of small 
boys hovered about. Some of them stood in 
awe, while viewing the preparations for getting 
away. Some looked wistfully at their older and 
more fortunate companions. A few ventured to 
poke a little fun at the youthful soldiers, show- 
ing no fear of an armed force. 

“Company, Fall in.” 

When that order was given, it really seemed 
as if camp had begun. Lieutenant Harding 
gave Lieutenant Miles a slap on the back, as 
they hurried to their places in the rear of the 
platoons, saying, “We are off.” 

“Right dress. Front.” 

As straight as a ramrod, the long line ex- 
tended across the High School yard. 

“Right shoulder. Arms.” 

Each gun was grasped at the balance by the 
right hand and lifted until the hand was at the 
height of the chin; each piece was then placed 
on the right shoulder, each hand was dropped 
to the side. 

“Right forward, fours right, March.” 

With swinging, alert step, the column moves 
from the yard, and Is on its way to the station. 

As the company is approaching the business 
section of Portage, followed by an interested 


66 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


group on the sidewalk, there suddenly sounds 
upon the air, the clanging alarm of ‘Tire” 
from the engine house gong. A tremor of ex- 
citement passes over the lines. Where is the 
fire? What is it? Soon the sound of galloping 
horses is heard. They are approaching the com- 
pany from the rear. Quickly the alert Captain 
shouts : 

“Left oblique, Double time, March.” 

In a moment, the boys are safe on the other 
side of the street. The fire chief, and the fire 
engine, hook and ladder, and hose cart dash 
by. People begin to rush toward the business 
section. A huge cloud of black smoke is seen 
rising about three blocks away. Mr. Kinsman 
and Mr. Sumner hold a hurried consultation. 
Would it be wise to take the company into 
that district? Just then, an automobile darhes 
up and an assistant fire chief steps out. He 
hastens to Mr. Kinsman. 

“There has been an explosion in the Tennant 
Block. Fire has spread through the whole 
building and it is going like tinder. There is 
great danger that the walls have been weakened 
and they may fall. The police force is too 
small to keep the people back, and the fire de- 
partment is hindered in its work. Could you 
use your company to help establish a fire line?” 

“We certainly can,” was the quick response. 


PREPARING FOR CAMP 67 

^‘Captain Warren,” he shouted, “Advance your 
men at double time.” 

“Company, Forward, Double Time, March.” 

The commands rang out with all the force 
of an officer about to make a charge in bat- 
tle. Quickly the company went down the 
street. Mr. Sumner stepped into the automo- 
bile, and went to the scene in advance, in order 
to determine what was best to be done. The 
greatest confusion prevailed. Three fire com- 
panies had arrived, but were impeded by the 
crowding townsfolk. The fire was burning 
briskly. The Tennant Building was in the mid- 
dle of a block on Main street, right at the head 
of Vine. A few policemen were vainly endeav- 
oring to hold back the ever growing crowd that 
was coming from both directions on Main and 
also from Vine. Mr. Sumner saw in a moment 
that there was serious work to be done. He 
quickly made his plans. A cheer was arising 
from up the street. It was getting louder. In 
two minutes the whole company of Young Cru- 
saders burst into view, marching in double time. 
Attention was taken momentarily from the fire. 
The chief of police rushed up and asked Mr. 
Sumner what could be done with the boys. 

“How many police have you?” 

“About ten.” 


68 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


“If you will put three officers with each of 
my platoons we will clear the street.” 

“I will do so,” answered the chief. 

In the meantime the boys had halted just 
before they reached the corner of Vine street. 
By a few short commands, they were stretched 
across Main in three lines, in open order, so 
that they reached from building to building. 
The astonished crowd, distracted between the 
boys and the fire, was on tiptoe of expectation. 
The fire companies had not yet succeeded in 
getting a stream on the fire, owing to the diffi- 
culties. Two stood on Vine street and one on 
Main. 

Above the din and confusion, the voice of Mr. 
Sumner was heard. 

“Carry Arms! Fix Bayonets.” 

As the shiny bayonets slipped into place, the 
crowd began to realize that they might be in 
the way, and there was a motion of retreat. 

“First platoon. Forward, Double time, 
March. 

“Second platoon. Forward, Column left, 
March. 

“Third platoon. About face, Forward, 
March.” 

There was no hesitation. The first platoon 
swept along Main street, and the people has- 
tened back. The second, quickly following. 


PREPARING FOR CAMP 69 

turned into Vine street, while the third having 
faced about, moved the crowd that had gath- 
ered behind them. The chief of police, true to 
his word, backed the shining bayonets with his 
men, who ran with the platoons, shouting to 
the people to move, and waving their short 
clubs. 

The crowd showed no disposition to hesitate. 
It began to give way. The Wardens, accord- 
ing to a permanent arrangement, went with 
their platoons: Mr. Kinsman with the first, 
Mr. Sumner with the second, Mr. Jackson with 
the third. This plan of oversight had been 
adopted early in the formation of the company. 
This left the Captain, Standard Bearer, and 
Bugler, standing in the street. 

The lieutenants were now directly in com- 
mand under the Wardens. They had their trou- 
bles. Lieutenant Harding, charging up Main 
street had the most. The crowd here was more 
dense. One big fellow was determined to get 
through the line. He dodged the police, and 
ran toward the line of bayonets. No boy would 
dare to touch him with the weapon, he knew. 
He passed the line between two boys, who 
vainly tried to seize him. But he reckoned 
without Harding. Jimmie knew that if one 
made a successful effort to break through, many 
would follow. They were all relying on the 


70 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

moral force of the attack, not the physical. 
But Jimmie had a high sense of duty. Tossing 
his sword from him, he made a swift run toward 
the intruder, who was running also, and with 
a skill, born of long practice, he tackled him, 
a regular football tackle about the knees. The 
man came to the ground in a heap. A police- 
man stood over him, as he arose angrily, and 
placed him under arrest. The crowd cheered 
wildly. No one else made an attempt to get 
closer. They feared Jimmie more than the 
bayonets. Harding resumed his sword. After 
a moment he brought his platoon to a halt. 
There it stood as a guard, while the policemen, 
now reinforced, maintained order. 

Lieutenant Miles, swinging into Vine street 
had less trouble. Just as they passed the fire 
apparatus, a hose began to play. For one mo- 
ment the firemen played it toward the crowd 
on Vine street. It was most effective. The 
platoon took up their station half way along 
the block, and stood guard. 

Lieutenant Potter had but a comparatively 
small crowd before him, when he charged his 
platoon on Main street in the other direction. 
They met with no difficulty. 

The fire was raging fiercely, but six streams 
were now directed upon it. The adjoining 
buildings were in danger, although protected 


PREPARING FOR CAMP 


71 

by fire walls. Valiantly the firemen worked. 
For an hour they battled. But it was in vain. 
Suddenly there was an ominous crackling, a 
moment’s warning. The fire chief ordered his 
men back. Scarcely had they reached safety, 
when the front wall collapsed, filling the street 
with a mass of stones, burning timbers and huge 
sparks. 

In another hour, the flames were completely 
under control. During all this time, the Young 
Crusaders kept their ground. Additional po- 
lice reserves had now reached the scene; ropes 
had been stretched and the order came for the 
Young Crusaders to assemble. Directions were 
given for each platoon to march into Vine 
street. This was done, and the whole company 
soon formed. 

There was great excitement among the boys. 
But Mr. Kinsman thought it best to get away 
from the scene, so they marched to the station. 
They had of course missed their early train, but 
there would be another within a short time. 

Orders were given, and soon the Young Cru- 
saders were lined up on the station platform, 
conscious that they were veterans with a good 
service record. 


72 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER VII. 

ARRIVAL AT CAMP. 

The train finally pulled 
in, and the boys found 
seats for their short jour- 
ney to Lynn’s Crossing, 
the station nearest the 
farm. The interested 
passengers asked scores 
of questions and the story 
of the organization and 
the fire was soon known 
to them. 

When the conductor 
had passed through the train, in company with 
Mr. Sumner, he said, ‘Tour ticket calls for 
forty-eight persons and I find only forty-seven.” 

Mr. Sumner was puzzled. He knew there 
ought to be forty-eight. There were thirty- 
six privates, eight officers, three Wardens and 
the colored cook who had joined them at the 
station. He quickly summoned the lieuten- 
ants and instructed each to discover if every 
member of his platoon was on the train. Lieu- 
tenant Harding soon reported that Pat 
McGuire was missing. He had certainly been 




ARRIVAL AT CAMP 


73 


at the station. Pat was reliable, and no de- 
serter. While Mr. Sumner was puzzling over 
his disappearance, the train stopped at Lynn’s 
Crossing. As they alighted and formed, the 
station master appeared, waving a telegram and 
calling “Mr. Kinsman.” 

Mr. Kinsman took the yellow sheet and 
read it. 

John Thomas Kinsman, Lynn’s Crossing: 

Unavoidably detained. Extravagantly apolo- 
getic. Instantaneous concurrence of unpre- 
meditated obstacles. Accelerabo. 

Patrick Terence O’Neil McGuire. 

Mr. Kinsman hastened to show it to the anx- 
ious Mr. Sumner. Both laughed. 

The perplexed station master waited a mo- 
ment and then said: 

“It’s none of my business,, but that’s the big- 
gest quarter’s worth of telegraphing that I have 
ever taken in this office. Is that fellow 
McGuire all right?” 

“He does seem to be wordy.” 

“I got it all pretty fair, until I came to that 
last word. I made them repeat it. I put it 
down as it came, and it sounds like some sort 
of vegetable. That fellow isn’t coming to 
these parts, by any chance, is he?” 


74 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


will be along on the next train. That 
word ‘accelerabo,’ is a Latin form, meaning ‘I 
shall hasten.’ Pat couldn’t get all in, within 
ten words, in English.” 

‘Well I’ll look out for him and hide behind 
the station when he comes. If he talked to me 
like that I’d not be able to send a ‘wire’ for a 
week. You’d better have someone here to take 
charge of him.” 

The station master retreated shaking his 
head. When last seen he was turning the key 
in the door of his little office, and locking the 
windows. 

Pat being accounted for, temporarily at least, 
the relieved officers made ready to march to the 
farm. It was about a mile distant. Over the 
country road went the company at route step. 
It was a beautiful day. The fields were yellow 
with waving ripened grain. A gentle breeze 
made tolerable the heat of the noon day sun. 
They passed several farm houses from which 
emerged entire families, for it was dinner hour, 
to see the unwonted sight. The great silken 
flag made a brilliant spot of color in the green 
background. Soon the company turned into a 
long lane. At the end they marched through a 
grove and out into the open meadow, their 
camp site. 

There were their wagons, not yet unloaded; 



THE WOODED SLOPE ON THE SOUTH CAST ITS SHADOW OVER THE CAMP 






ARRIVAL AT GAMP 


75 


the weary drivers were taking a nap in the 
shade of the trees. The boys were marched to 
the edge of the grove, and commanded to be 
at ease and eat their lunches. Quickly they 
made themselves comfortable on the grass, 
opened their knapsacks, and satisfied their hun- 
ger. 

It was a beautiful location for a camp. A 
wide bit of meadow land lay at the edge of a 
wooded slope. At the west end was a thick, 
wild grove with a deep ravine stretching on for 
a long distance. On the north was a hill with 
the lower portions gently sloping, and rising 
more abruptly above. Its top was crowned 
with trees. On the east was the wide grove 
through which they marched, flanked by the 
edge of a large tract of forest land. A creek 
ran from the ravine, crossed the open space, 
and followed the foot of the hill to the distant 
river. The creek divided the open space into 
two parts. The camp site itself was roomy, and 
covered with close cropped grass. The wooded 
slope on the south cast its shadow over the spot 
in the afternoon, making it cool and pleasant. 

After lunch the unloading proceeded with 
system. The wagons were drawn to the east 
edge, but a little to one side, of the camp 
proper. To the north of the camp site there 
was outlined by a few stones a duplicate plan of 


76 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

the camp, with Headquarters at one end. The 
kitchen was to be beyond the creek. When the 
duplicate place had been traced and each tent 
indicated by a stone, the boys in groups of three 
were ordered to take their places about the 
stones so that the relative position and arrange- 
ment of the groups could be determined. The 
tent for the officers was to be at the foot of the 
camp street. 

As each article was taken from the wagon it 
was carried to the place in the temporary camp 
plan, corresponding to the place in the camp 
that it would later occupy. Everything belong- 
ing to the kitchen was carried directly to the 
site beyond the creek. The tents themselves 
were left near the wagons. 

In a short time the wagons were empty and 
all the possessions of the company were ar- 
ranged in piles on their temporary abiding 
place on the camp plan, just north of the camp 
site. As yet not a single thing was on the spot 
where the camp itself would rise. 

The first platoon was then detailed to erect 
the cook’s tent, to set up the stove, the tables, 
and to arrange the boxes of provisions. The 
second platoon was detailed to erect the large 
Headquarters tent. The third platoon was de- 
tailed to erect the first tent of the camp street. 

It was a scene of greatest activity. Head- 


ARRIVAL AT CAMP 


77 

quarters tent, with its twin poles and enormous 
fly, was soon in position. The air resounded' 
with the sound of hammers in the hands of the 
boys driving the stakes for the tent ropes. Tent 
No. I was soon in place on the right and in 
front of Headquarters. The others quickly fol- 
lowed, being carefully placed so that each tent 
was equally distant from its neighbor, and in 
perfect alignment. The tents were in two rows 
facing each other. The rows were about thirty 
feet apart, forming a street. There were seven 
tents on each side. At one end was Headquar- 
ters and at the other end was erected the tent 
for the officers. 

When all this was done, each boy was in- 
structed to bring his cot to his tent. This was 
done with no confusion, owing to the fact that 
each boy’s belongings had been properly dis- 
tributed in the temporary camp plan. There 
were three cots in each tent, one against each 
side wall and one against the rear wall. They 
then brought their boxes, took out their cloth- 
ing and made their beds. 

Mr. Kinsman, Mr. Sumner and Mr. Jackson 
took possession of Headquarters; Warren, 
Harding, Miles and Potter occupied the offi- 
cers’ tent. Brewer and Inwood had one tent 
to themselves, as did Russell and Durr. 

By five o’clock everything was in order, and 


78 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

a tired lot of boys awaited the summons to sup- 
per. But the colored cook, he who had cooked 
at many a meeting of the National Guard, had 
had troubles of his own. It was a long task to 
prepare a camp kitchen so that nearly fifty 
persons could be fed three times a day. But 
Blewie, the cook, had the knack, and by an in- 
genious use of facilities at hand, he soon had 
a great kettle of hot soup, a pan of hard boiled 
eggs, and thick slices of corn beef, on the serv- 
ing table. 

The company was assembled by the welcome 
call of “Mess,” sounded on the bugle. Ac- 
cording to previous instruction, each carried 
his plate and cup, and other utensils for his 
personal use. The eager line was marched 
past the serving tables, where the three War- 
dens, giving an example of duty to be expected 
later of all the others, filled each cup with soup, 
and heaped each plate with the other provi- 
sions prepared by Blewie. The boys, as sooil 
as supplied, sat by the long tables, and with 
rollicking joke, and good natured fun, satisfied 
the inner man. Each, as he finished, washed 
his dishes in the creek and restored them to 
his tent. 

After an hour, the bugle again sounded, this 
time “Assembly.” Mr. Sumner stood before 
the group and made a speech. 


ARRIVAL AT CAMP 


79 


“You have done valiant service today and 
the Wardens are very proud of cooperating 
with you. We have had a long day, with much 
work. So no more will be expected of you to- 
night, except to go to bed and get a good rest. 
Our routine will begin tomorrow after break- 
fast and will continue without interruption. 
Captain Warren will be Officer of the Day 
and have charge of all the routine duty and 
of the camp. .Each private will be on guard 
duty in turn. There will be one guard from 
6 a. m. to lo p. m., and two guards from lo 
p. m. throughout the night. Your hours of 
duty will be posted and you must be ready near 
your tent when your time comes. The Officer 
of the Day will change the guards during the 
day, and until ten at night. After that the 
guards must awaken those who are to follow 
them, at the proper time. Tattoo will sound 
at 9 and Taps at 9:15. Any noise in tents after 
Taps will become a cause for discipline. May 
you sleep well. Dismissed.” 

Although Taps were not to be sounded for an 
hour, many boys made their way to their tents 
to get ready for the night. A few built a bon- 
..fire on the edge of the camp and sat near it. 
They were all too tired for much frolic. 

At nine sharp, Little Joe stood before Head- 
quarters tent, and lifted his bugle to his lips. 


8o THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Soon ‘‘Tattoo” resounded through the camp, 
and the few strollers quickly hastened beneath 
canvas. Fifteen minutes later, the slow and 
melodious notes of Taps sounded, and as the 
last lingering note died away the lights in 
each tent went out. Only Headquarters and 
the officers’ tent remained lighted. They had 
special privileges. 

The Wardens and the Captain sat before the 
bonfire discussing the day’s events in low voices. 
Little Joe joined them. Suddenly he said, 

“Where’s Pat?” 

In the excitement of the day, Pat had been 
forgotten. 

“Why sure enough,” said Mr. Sumner, “Pat 
is not here yet. I heard a train whistle a while 
ago. I believe I will stroll to the road. He 
may be on the way.” 

Ten minutes later Mr. Sumner appeared, 
and with him the pathetic figure of Pat. There 
was a look of chagrin and disappointment on 
his face, that was not often seen in the joyous 
features of the light hearted Pat. 

Mr. Jackson, with an instinct that was unerr- 
ing, hastened to the kitchen and brought Pat 
all that he could readily find of the remains of 
the supper. Pat ate with such relish that all 
knew that hunger had added to his despair. 
But the food restored somewhat his spirits, and 


ARRIVAL AT CAMP 8i 

he soon began to tell his story, under a fire of 
questions. 

“Gentlemen, if ye will let me tell it me own 
way, ril give you all the facts. The most obvi- 
ous fact is that I am a green Irishman. Ye 
know we stood a considerable time upon the 
platform of the station. A polite stranger de- 
sired to learn the rayson for the massing of our 
troops, and he asked me a number of ques- 
tions. I wasn’t reluctant to enlighten him. He 
was a pleasant man, and began to make some 
personal inquiries. He then said that he was a 
jeweler by trade, and was traveling about the 
state trying to introduce a famous Swiss move- 
ment for watches. ‘Had I watch?’ I had. 
He asked to look at it. He did. ‘This is a 
fine case,’ says he, ‘but inferior works.’ It was 
a good watch, just given to me by my father. 
‘It’s all right,’ says I. ‘It is indeed,’ says he, ‘but 
it would be a hundred percent better if it had 
my Swiss movement. You’re a fine group of 
lads,’ says he, ‘and if ye will let me take your 
watch to the jeweler’s yonder. I’ll insert an 
elegant Swiss movement in your case in less 
than no time. The train will not be here for 
ten minutes.’ 

“Well, I let him do it. As I stood watching 
him go into the jeweler’s, the train pulled in. 
I ran to the jeweler’s with all my might, but 


82 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


wHen I entered, the store was empty except for 
the jeweler himself, who was a’fixing of an old 
clock. Where’s that man?’ says 1. What 
man?’ says he. The fellow with the Swiss 
movement,’ says I, excited like, ‘who came in 
here.’ ‘He passed through the store,’ says he. 
‘He said he was trying to find a drayman in 
the alley.’ I ran through but there was no one 
there. 

“When I came back the train was gone, but 
there was my man a’standing on the platform, 
thinking I was on the train. Just then I saw 
Jerry, a’waitin’ near the station. I told what 
had happened, and Jerry called a friend of his. 
Together we walked up to our man with the 
Swiss movement. He was so surprised he did 
not have time to run. 

“ ‘I’ll trouble you for my watch,’ says I. 
‘What watch,’ says he, kind o’ feeble. ‘Turn 
him upside down, Jerry,’ says I. ‘Wait,’ says 
he, now scared. ‘Be you the lad that dropped 
the watch on the station platform?’ ‘I am,’ 
says I, ‘and it had a five dollar bill sticking 
through the stem-ring.’ ‘What,’ says he, sur- 
prised like. ‘Yes,’ says I, ‘a five dollar bill, 
didn’t it, Jerry?’ ‘Sure,’ says Jerry. 

“Well that Swiss movement man reached 
into one pocket and pulled out me watch, and 
into another pocket and pulled out a five dollar 


ARRIVAL AT CAMP 83 

bill and handed it to me. I made a polite 
speech, thanking him for his courtesy and hop- 
ing that he would visit us again, and then we 
went and sent you the telegram. I tried to get 
my money’s worth in that telegram, as it went 
such a short distance. And here is the five 
dollars. It isn’t mine. I am sorry I had to 
appear to tell a lie, but it wasn’t really a lie. 
It was merely a polite hint. It’s for the camp 
fund. And now I think I’ll go to bed. Good 
night.” 

“Just a moment, Pat,” said Mr. Kinsman. “I 
am not sure that I approve of your taking this 
money. I presume it would have cost the man 
much more than this had you handed him over 
to the police, but you must find some very good 
use for this five dollars. Good night.” 


84 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


j CHAPTER VIIL 

A LONG DAY. 

The same night before 
going to bed, Mr. Kins- 
man dropped into the 
officers’ tent. He found 
the Captain and lieuten- 
ants in deep discussion. 

“Mr. Kinsman,” asked 
Miles, “what is the name 
of this camp to be?” 

“Well, well, we do 
need a name,” was the 
reply; “what would you suggest?” 

“I would suggest,” said Happy Potter, “that 
we call it Camp Mosquito. I have reliable in- 
formation that there is a national convention 
of mosquitoes in the grove,” and he slapped 
his neck vigorously. 

“ ‘Camp Crusader’ appeals to me,” said 
Jimmie Harding. “This camp is too dignified 
to be called after one of the fowls of the air, or 
the beasts of the field, whichever the pesky 
mosquito is. He is the white man’s burden in 
this part of the world, that’s sure.” 



A LONG DAY 85 

‘‘Try your famous knee high tackle on him, 
Jimmie,” said Art Miles. 

Jimmie grinned at this suggestion. 

“ ‘Camp Crusader’ is a good name, I think,” 
was Tom’s comment. 

“We shall have a meeting of the officers to- 
morrow and decide upon the name. I think, 
too, that ‘Camp Crusader’ is satisfactory.” And 
Mr. Kinsman said “Good-night,” and went to 
his tent. 

The day dawned upon a soundly sleeping 
camp. The boys were tired from their previ- 
ous day’s experience. At six o’clock, however, 
the guard awakened Little Joe, who went out 
into the camp street and sounded the exhilarat- 
ing call of “Reveille.” The boys, not accustomed 
to being under canvas and no doubt disturbed 
by the bright sunlight, soon aroused from their 
slumber. In a few minutes the bank of the 
creek was lined with stooping figures. They 
were dashing water over head, face and neck, 
and rubbing themselves dry with rough towels. 
It was a primitive arrangement, but the best 
that the camp afforded as yet. 

Promptly at six-thirty, the Bugler sounded 
the welcome call of “Mess” and the long line 
assembled, without coats now that camp was in 
progress, and marched to the serving table. 
Breakfast consisted of cereal, potatoes and ba- 


86 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


con, bread and coffee. Blewie, the colored 
cook, had been hard at work since sun up. He 
had drafted, by a promise of extra favors, one 
or two sleepless boys, who had arisen early and 
had gone forth to explore the immediate sur- 
roundings of the camp. Blewie was a charac- 
ter. His real name was not Blewie, but when 
he had first appeared on the platform of the 
station one of the boys asked him, “Where did 
you come from?” He answered smiling, “Oh, I 
just blew in, came in an airship, and blew right 
here.” “Good for you, Blewie,” responded 
the boy, and Blewie it was from that time. 

After breakfast the company had half an 
hour to clean up the camp and straighten out 
the tents. The officers then made a round of 
inspection. No neglect of cleanliness or order 
was overlooked. Every stick, stone or scrap of 
paper was removed from each tent and the ad- 
joining part of the camp street. The walls of 
each tent were raised so that it could be thor- 
oughly dried by the morning sun, and every 
article of clothing was put in its proper place. 

After this was done, the company was again 
assembled and Mr. Sumner gave a long talk, 
with all the instructions as to the work of the 
camp, and its discipline. He also invited ques- 
tions, so that there could be no doubt as to the 
meaning of his instructions. 


I A LONG DAY 


87 

The discipline of the camp was to be lenient 
and at the same time rigid. They had come for 
a good time, and the camp regulations were 
only those that would insure health, regularity 
and the accomplishment of necessary work. 
Every opportunity would be given for fun and 
freedom. But such rules as were necessary 
would be rigidly enforced. Each boy was to 
be credited with twenty merit marks. By each 
breach of discipline he would forfeit one or 
more marks, according to the judgment of the 
Warden. Should the twenty merit marks be 
forfeited the boy would be sent home. 

The company then marched to the shade of 
a tree near by, which was designated as the 
Church. Here Mr. Kinsman conducted a brief 
service, using the Book of Common Prayer, 
with which the camp had been supplied. As 
the familiar prayers, used by many generations 
of our ancestors, were quietly offered, in the 
great open cathedral of nature, an uplifting 
seriousness seemed to rest upon the youthful 
faces. The hearty responses, and the full voiced 
‘‘Amens” were an indication of strong interest 
and real devotion. 

Serious drill began after “Church.” The 
three platoons of nvelve boys each were drilled 
separately, ^in order to give experience to the 
lieutenants. It was found a more difficult mat- 


88 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


ter to keep the alignment and proper distance 
on the rough pasture land, than it was on the 
smooth city pavement. For an hour the pla- 
toons marched and countermarched, or prac- 
ticed the manual of arms. 

Drill over, the company marched to the 
camp street to await further orders. For con- 
venience the first boy of each set of four was 
designated as a sergeant, and for detail duty 
had charge of his set of fours. Each detail had 
its duty, and as each task was accomplished the 
sergeant reported to the Officer of the Day. 
Mr. Sumner read the detail duty. 

‘‘Sergeant Campbell, detailed to clean camp 
and surrounding territory.” 

“Sergeant Ross, detailed to plan a flag staff.” 

“Sergeant Brown, detailed to cut kindling 
for cook and to carry water.” 

“Sergeant Merril, detailed to throw a bridge 
over creek, from camp to kitchen.” 

“Sergeant Hamilton, detailed to find a swim- 
ming hole.” So to each some duty was as- 
signed. 

The Red Cross Squad in command of Ted 
Potter set itself seriously to study Major Pil- 
cher’s book on “First Aid to the Injured.” 
They learned the difference between a false 
knot or “Granny” and an effective reef knot, 
practicing with their handkerchiefs. Slings ana 


A LONG DAY 


89 

bandages were also made, and each boy of the 
squad, in turn, became a patient and was 
swathed in bandages. Bruises and burns were 
investigated, and the proper treatment was 
learned. 

Tourniquets, or bandages tightly twisted to 
stop bleeding, were also studied. This knowl- 
edge proved very useful to one boy, who later 
in the year, while hunting ducks, received the 
full load of his gun in the arm, by accidental 
discharge. He was alone in his boat at the 
time. He made a tourniquet by twisting his 
handkerchief about his arm with the aid of a 
pocket knife, and thus stopped the bleeding 
until help arrived. It was said by the surgeons 
who later treated him, that his promptness in 
making the tourniquet saved his life. 

The experience of Blewie was very service- 
able at one crisis. A boy was led to Head- 
quarters who had been blinded temporarily by 
pepper, which another boy was thoughtlessly 
trying to sprinkle beneath his nose to make him 
sneeze. The Squad and the Wardens were at 
a loss what to do. The form of Blewie ap- 
peared in the door. ‘‘Bathe the eyes in this 
warm milk,” was his direction, holding out a 
pan. The news Ivad reached him, and he had 
acted promptly. The remedy was effective. 

The treatment for poisons was also studied. 


90 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


The camp was not without its minor accidents 
and ailments. But the efficient Red Cross 
Squad under the direction of Mr. Sumner, was 
equal to every emergency, and every boy kept 
well. 

When work was done the boys were free. 
But it was nearly dinner time, and they were 
quite hungry enough to welcome the call of 
“Mess.” 

After dinner an hour was taken to practice 
for a sham battle, which was to be a daily feat- 
ure of the camp. The boys were then free for 
the afternoon. It was not long before the camp 
looked like a deserted village. Except for the 
Officer of the Day and the solitary guard on his 
beat all were gone. Most of the boys went 
swimming in the large creek about half a mile 
away. A few explored the surrounding hills, 
while two or three took a long walk to the 
nearest village. At five all were in camp again 
for flag lowering. 

It was announced that the camp would be 
called “Camp Crusader.” 

In the evening in the long twilight of June, 
the camp presented an animated appearance. 
There was a game of baseball on the pasture 
land, and races and jumping. As the light 
failed many gathered round the camp fire, 

, where Mr. Jackson was telling stories of col- 


A LONG DAY 


91 


lege experiences. Some were in Headquarters’ 
tent consulting with Mr. Sumner. Some read 
in their own tents. A few were writing letters 
by the candle light. Several had found a source 
of pleasure in the wisdom of Blewie and were 
in his kitchen. At night he cast off the official 
sternness of camp cook and made the boys wel- 
come. He was a man with high regard for 
soldierly discipline. 

When all was quiet that night, little Joe 
joined Tom, who was sitting alone by the bon- 
fire, waiting for the hour of ten when his du- 
ties as Officer of the Day should cease. 

‘Tom,” said Joe, “listen. I have discovered 
something today. Is anyone about?” 

“I think not,” said Tom. “What have you 
discovered? That camp life gives one an ap- 
petite?” 

“Better than that,” answered Joe, glancing 
around to see that the sentinel was not near. 
The sentinel was at the other end of the beat, 
quietly enjoying a doughnut that the cook had 
given him. “I have discovered something that 
may help us to solve the mystery.” 

“What is it?” was Tom’s calm reply. “Not 
some more a’s and b’s, written anywhere, I 
hope.” 

“No, listen. Frank Merril and I went off for 
a walk. We were about half a mile from here 


92 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


on the road that leads up the hill, south of the 
camp. We met a farmer, and he stopped and 
asked who we were. He was surprised at our 
uniforms. When I told him, he asked, ‘Be ye 
campin’ on Ezra Russell’s old place?’ I was 
surprised at that as I thought it was Uncle 
Russell’s. So I asked him if Mr. Ezra Russell 
once owned it. He said that it was his until 
he died, and that Uncle Ezra had spent much 
of his time there. He then asked where the 
camp was. We could not see the tents from 
where we were, but just in the green spot below 
the camp the sentinel was walking. We could 
see him plainly. ‘Do you see that sentinel?’ 
I asked, pointing at him. ‘Of course,’ said he, 
‘that tree can be seen for miles around.’ I was 
awfully perplexed for a moment, but it came 
over me like a flash, that the parchment had a 
tree on it and the word ‘Sentinel.’ I glanced in 
the direction the farmer had indicated and sure 
enough in the woods beyond the camp one tree 
was very plainly towering above the rest. I 
made some foolish remark, and then carefully 
noted the exact location of that tree. I am 
sure I can go right to it. Now that’s our start, 
and if we do not discover something more, then 
we are dummies.” 

Tom sat silent a moment. Finally he said, 
“Joe, you are a wonder. You know the story 


A LONG DAY 


93 


about Thoreau and the Indian arrow head?” 
Joe shook his head. ‘Well, one day he was 
taking a walk with a stranger, near his home in 
Concord and the stranger asked Thoreau where 
arrow heads could be found. ‘Everywhere,’ 
said Thoreau, and he stooped forward and 
picked one up. That’s luck. You have it. Let’s 
take another look at the parchment.” 

Joe went to his tent, opened a box and reach- 
ing to the very bottom of it got out the en- 
velope. He carried it back to the bonfire and 
he and Tom studied it again. 

“It’s the letters that bother us,” was Tom’s 
comment. “I do not suppose finding the tree 
if it is the tree, will help us unless we decipher 
this disarranged alphabet.” 

“Suppose we take a look at the tree tomor- 
row. I’ll ask Mr. Kinsman to let us off before 
the sham battle practice, so we can slip away. 
By the way, Frank Merril gave me a bit of 
news. It seems that Mr. Kinsman is a second 
cousin of Frank’s father. That is how he knew 
about it. Mr. Kinsman’s father received a 
legacy when Mr. Kinsman was young. He had 
to take a journey to Australia to claim it. He 
wrote to Mrs. Kinsman that he had secured the 
money and would start home at once. Later 
word came that the vessel on which he sailed 
was lost at sea. He was not among the sur- 


94 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


vivors. Mr. Kinsman is engaged to a girl 
in Cleveland, but he cannot marry as he has to 
support his mother. Frank Merril says that 
Mr. Kinsman is doing what he can to save 
money enough to marry, but that it looks as if 
he would be compelled to wait a long time.” 

^‘That’s too bad, Joe. Was the money lost 
too?” 

‘‘No one knows. Frank says they have in- 
vestigated thoroughly but have found nothing.” 

“I heard father say that Mr. Kinsman might 
be elected principal of our high school some 
day, if he stayed here, but that it might be a 
long time.” 

“Here comes that sentinel, Tom. Give me 
the paper. I think I’ll turn in. Good-night.” 

“Good-night, Joe.” 

Tom sat before the fire for some time, 
watching the dying embers. The moon was 
just peeping over the tree tops, which appeared 
as a delicate waving tracery against the sky. 
The white tents made golden by the glow of 
the moon looked like magic temples raised by 
fairy hands. The stillness of the quiet night 
aroused his thoughts to the solemnity of na- 
ture’s resplendent beauty. Nothing was stir- 
ting in camp or tent, except the dark figure of 
the slowly moving sentinel, who, gun on shoul- 
der as he went, made his watchful tour from 


A LONG DAY 


95 

end to end of the camp. Ten o’clock finally 
came and Tom awoke the two guards in tent 
four, and having stationed them on their beats, 
went quietly toward his tent. 

On the camp street he saluted Mr. Kinsman 
who was making his usual late inspection, and 
entering his tent he prepared to go to bed. 

As was his custom, Mr. Kinsman went from 
tent to tent, throwing the light from an electric 
candle for an instant upon each sleeping fig- 
ure. In one tent a boy would be found who had 
fallen asleep in his clothes. This boy must be 
assisted to undress. In another tent the blankets 
had slipped to the ground and must be ad- 
justed. So each one’s comfort was looked after. 

When he looked into Tent 5 he found but 
one boy, little Larry Brush. The other cots 
were empty. Mr. Kinsman consulted his dia- 
gram and learned that his tent-mates were on 
guard. The little fellow seemed very restless. 
The Warden tried to discover the cause and 
stood watching the fair face of Larry, one of 
the youngest boys in the camp. He was mut- 
tering in his sleep. Mr. Kinsman laid a hand 
upon his head. He had no fever. 

Suddenly Larry raised up with a quick and 
startled exclamation, “Mother, where are 
you?” His eyes were wide open and he stared 


96 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

about. Mr. Kinsman put his hand on his 
shoulder. 

“All right, Larry, old chap. Having a 
dream 

“Oh, it’s you, sir. I thought I heard mother’s 
voice.” 

“Well, that would be a good sound, wouldn’t 
it, Larry? I’d like to hear my mother’s voice, 
too.” Mr. Kinsman had lighted a candle and 
taken a seat on the other cot. “Aren’t you 
sleeping well?” 

“It took me some time to drop off, tonight. 
You see my tent mates are on guard, and that 
left me alone. It was very quiet after they 
had gone. I got to thinking about things at 
home. Portage seemed pretty far away. I 
guess-I guess-I guess I got lonesome.” 

“No wonder, old chap. You didn’t eat too 
much supper, did you?” 

“No, sir. I was a little out of sorts, and I 
didn’t want much.” 

“What do you say to a bit of lunch, Larry? 
I could stand it, too. We’ll just fool those 
guards and get some. Wait right here till I 
go to Headquarters.” 

When Mr. Kinsman returned he had a warm 
dressing gown. Larry stood up and the War- 
den wrapped it around him. 


A LONG DAY 


97 

‘‘See here, Larry, if Mr. Sumner wakes up 
we’ll both lose five points. So be quiet.” 

The boy chuckled. 

“Jump on my back. You can’t walk bare- 
footed over this street.” 

The little arms of Larry were soon about 
Mr. Kinsman’s neck, as he hung on his back. 
They left the tent and slipped along in the 
shadows. When they reached Headquarters, 
Mr. Kinsman plumped him into his own large 
cot. There was just light enough to see the 
quiet figures of the other Wardens. 

“Now you keep watch of Mr. Sumner. He 
eats boys at night, clothes and all. If he wakes 
up, duck under the blankets. When I come 
back. I’ll give a low whistle outside. If every- 
thing is all right, you cough.” 

In about five minutes Larry heard the 
whistle. He responded with a cough. Mr. 
Kinsman tiptoed in, giving a glance at the 
second Warden. 

“We mustn’t get caught or we may be sent 
home, Larry.” 

He placed a tray on the cot, and drawing up 
a camp stool sat down. There were two bowls 
of milk, several large slices of bread and two 
spoons. 

“Pitch in, Larry. This is a lark.” And 


98 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Mr. Kinsman lighted a candle, carefully shad- 
ing it from the Wardens. 

Larry’s eyes sparkled. 

“This tastes fine. Wouldn’t mother be sur- 
prised to see us here, if she could look in? She’s 
coming out Friday. May I tell her about 
this?” 

“Better not, son, or she will think I am a 
bad comrade for you, helping you to break the 
rules this way.” 

“This is a fine camp, Mr. Kinsman. I am 
having a great time. I hope we can stay a 
good while.” 

“Glad you enjoy it. But we men up here 
get lonesome, too, so when you have nothing 
else to do, come around to Headquarters. I 
always have a few odd jobs that I like a boy to 
help me with.” 

“I’ll do it,” and Larry’s face lighted up. He 
had now eaten every morsel of his feast. 

“You stay right here tonight. I’ll need you 
first thing in the morning, and you’ll be 
handy.” 

“But where will you sleep?” 

“Oh! I’ll manage. I have something to do 
now. So drop off, and sweet dreams.” 

Already the eyes of Larry were heavy. His 
head sank on the pillow and he relaxed into 
quiet slumber. 


A LONG DAY 


99 


Mr. Kinsman waited until he saw the boy 
breathing regularly, and then cast his light 
toward the other Wardens. Both were up on 
their elbows, and looking with amused interest 
at the sleeping child. 

“Not sick, John?” asked Mr. Sumner. 

“Homesick, but he’s all right now. You 
two imitations of sleeping beauties watch him. 
I’m going to bed. Good-night.” 

Mr. Kinsman informed the guards that Lar- 
ry had been restless and that he had taken him 
to Headquarters to make sure he was not ill. 

That night Mr. Kinsman slept in Larry’s 
cot in Tent 5. 


loo THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER IX. 

THE SIGNAL CORPS: ALSO A DISCOVERY. 

It was a refreshed 
company of boys that 
assembled the next morn- 
ing. They had become 
tired from the unaccus- 
tomed duties of camp 
and had slept long. They 
began to realize that 
sufficient sleep is abso- 
lutely necessary, that one 
may enjoy life in a mili- 
tary camp. To a tired 
boy everything is a burden. The greatest em- 
phasis had been laid upon the necessity of keep- 
ing quiet after taps. 

Several breaches of discipline had occurred 
and Mr. Sumner had a list of them in his hand. 
He said briefly: 

“I shall read the names of those who have 
forfeited credits. Inasmuch as some of you arc 
trying to have a clean record, we have deter- 
mined that if no further breach of discipline is 
reported for any boy whose name is read to- 
day, the credit points will be restored at the 



THE SIGNAL CORPS 


lOI 


end of the camp; in that way you may earn a 
clean record. 

^‘Ingham forfeits one point, for being late 
for supper. 

“Norris forfeits one point, for being late for 
drill. 

“Gibbon forfeits two points, for leaving his 
gun outside his tent all night. 

“Barry forfeits one point, for loud talking in 
his tent after taps. 

“Bush forfeits two points, for leaving camp 
bounds without permission. 

“Sergeant Canfield, you and your squad will 
report to Mr. Jackson for special drill.” 

Canfield and the three others of his set of 
four were mystified as to what that might 
mean. Mr. Jackson had a little bunch of tightly 
rolled flags in his hands. They went to a se- 
cluded place, and while the company had its 
regular drill, Mr. Jackson explained to them 
their special task. 

He placed them about ten feet apart, and 
facing his own position. To each he gave a 
flag, mounted on a light bamboo pole. The 
flags were of white muslin, four feet square, 
having a red block, sixteen inches square, in 
the center. 

Taking his own flag, Mr. Jackson said: 

“I am about to instruct you in the principles 


102 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


of military signalling. It is often necessary to 
send messages in this manner. There are two 
stations, a sending station and a receiving sta- 
tion. They may be as far apart as a flag can be 
seen with the naked eye. In a clear atmos- 
phere the four foot flag may be read four or 
five miles. By using a field glass, it may be 
read twice as far. 

“We now represent a sending station. 

“You will take the position of a soldier fac- 
ing an imaginary receiving station on yonder 
hill. 

“Grasp the staff with both hands at the lower 
end, holding it upright, hands at waist. 

“There are three motions to be learned: 

“Motion I. The signal is waved directly 
to your right, dipping the flag nearly to the 
ground. 

“Motion 2. The signal is waved in a simi- 
lar manner to the left. 

“Motion 3. The signal is waved in a simi- 
lar manner in front. 

“Every letter of the alphabet is made by 
various combinations of motions i and 2. 

“Motion three is used at the end of words 
and sentences. 

“The letter A is 22. That is, the flag is 
waved twice to the left. When I announce the 
letter you will make the signal. 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


103 


“Attention, Signal Corps. A.” Four flags 
waving to the left of the sender, dipped twice 
to the ground. The boys easily grasped these 
simple principles. Five letters, A, B, C, D and 
E were learned thoroughly. Then Mr. Jack- 
son announced simple words and the corps 
made the proper signals. 

Bad, 21 12-22-222-3. 

Bed, 21 1 2-1 2-222-3. * 

Cab, 1 2 1-22-2 1 12-3. 

Bead, 21 1 2-1 2-22-222-3. 

Then to each boy was given a slip of paper 
and he was required to write all the letters 
and their signals as follows : 


A....22 

J....II22 

S... 

.212 

B....2II2 

K....2I2I 

T.. 

..2 

C....I2I 

L....22I 

U.. 

..1 12 

D....222 

M....I22I 

V.. 

..1222 

E....I2 

N....I1 

W. 

...II 2 I 

F....222I 

0 .... 2 I 

X.. 

..2122 

G....22II 

P....I2I2 

Y.. 

..III 

H....I22 

Q....I2II 

Z.. 

.2222 


R....2II 

tion....i II2 


NUMERALS. 



I.... 1 1 1 1 

4....2221 

7... 

-1222 

2. ...2222 

3.... 1 122 

8... 

.21 I I 

3....III2 

6 .... 22 I I 

9... 

.1221 



0. . 

.2112 


104 the young crusaders 

Two boys were then sent about one hundred 
yards away to represent a receiving station, and 
were required to read the signals which were 
sent to them. They in turn became a sending 
station. 

Finally Mr. Jackson said, “You will en- 
deavor to learn the signals of each letter so that 
you need not refer to your chart. Tomorrow 
you will be required to give these instructions 
to other sets of fours. Dismissed.” 

The enthusiasm for signalling spread rap- 
idly through the camp. During the afternoon 
many of the boys copied the chart of the al- 
phabet, and learned the signals for the letters. 
They formed a long line leading from the ra- 
vine to the road — and messages were relayed 
from one to the other. It was not long before 
the letters were learned. 

Joe and Tom received the necessary permis- 
sion to leave the camp before the skirmish and 
they made their way toward the woods. Joe 
found his task of discovering his big tree hard- 
er than he expected. The forest was large and 
the foliage very thick and he could not dis- 
tinguish the tree tops plainly. For some time 
they walked. They came to a large oak tree 
which prompted Joe to say: 

“This must be the ‘Sentinel.’ It seems larger 
than any tree here.” 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


105 

“It is very hard to tell when there are so 
many big trees.” 

“I have it,” said Joe. “I’ll climb this tree 
and look about.” 

“But this tree is too big for you to climb, 
Joe.” 

Joe pulled from his belt a short hatchet with 
a small head. The sharp blade was incased in 
a sheathe. 

“I’ll manage it,” was Joe’s determination. He 
selected a small tree and quickly felled it. 
Trimming away the upper boughs but leaving 
the stout lower branches of the sapling, Joe 
leaned it against the huge oak, bracing it 
securely. He scrambled up the sapling and 
was soon in the topmost branches of the oak. 

Turning about carefully, he made a survey as 
well as he could. 

“I see it,” he shouted to Tom. “Look where 
I am pointing.” 

With difficulty Tom saw the direction indi- 
cated. 

“Wait, Joe,” shouted Tom in return. “I will 
walk in that direction and you tell me when 
I am right.” 

Tom made his way for a hundred feet. Joe 
spied him and called out: 

“More to your left. There, hold that place.” 

Joe scrambled down, while Tom waited. Joe 


io6 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


stood at the foot of the tree he had climbed, 
and sighting past Tom, located a second point 
beyond. 

“Hold your place, Tom,” he said. He then 
walked past Tom, to the point he had estab- 
lished. 

“This is the right direction. Sight past me, 
to a point beyond me, Tom.” 

Tom did so, and repeated Joe’s tactics. In 
a very short time they arrived at a tree about 
which they had no doubt. It was a giant oak, 
with a little open space about it. They could 
see that its top towered above its fellows. 

“Here she is, Tom,” shouted the exultant 
Joe. Joe made a low bow to the tree and then 
went up and gave it several pats with his open 
hand. “We have long desired to make your 
acquaintance.” 

Joe drew the parchment from his pocket, 
and they studied it with earnestness. But they 
got no further for it was undoubtedly the let- 
ters that gave the clue to the mystery. 

“We may as well go back to camp,” re- 
marked Tom, at length. “How shall we find 
this tree easily again?” 

“We can blaze a trail with my hatchet,” an- 
swered Joe. 

They carefully selected a tree which lay in 
the general direction of the camp and Joe 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


107 

was about to cut into the bark, when Tom said: 

‘^We’d better not damage any more trees. 
This is a private woods, and your Uncle Rus- 
sell might not like it. Let us take a small 
withe and tie it around the tree.” 

They had no difficulty in finding a small 
supple switch, which they tied about the first 
tree. Into this they fastened small branches, 
with green leaves, so that the tree was girdled 
with a green belt. It was as conspicuous as the 
blazed bark would have been. This operation 
they repeated at short distances. Soon they 
emerged into the creek bed. After marking 
the point of entrance to their trail in the for- 
est, they returned to the camp, more deter- 
mined than ever to discover the hidden mean- 
ing of Uncle Ezra’s parchment. 

The afternoon passed as usual for the boys, 
and the evening was filled with discussions as 
to signalling both with flag and lantern. Talk 
turned likewise upon the possibility of a gen- 
uine invader getting into the camp past the 
sentinel. Ghost stories were also hinted at. The 
restlessness that sometimes overtakes groups of 
boys seemed to prevail in the camp. The War- 
dens noticed this and were watchful. 

But the camp quieted down and the Wardens 
went to bed. Soon after ten, two creeping fig- 
ures might have been seen stealing from the 


io8 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


rear of one of the tents and crawling in the 
shadow of the trees toward the grove. No one 
noticed them, however. They evaded the sen- 
tinel by waiting until he was at the opposite 
end of the beat. Once in the darkness of the 
grove they stood upright and whispered to- 
gether. They were Pat McGuire and “Lucky” 
Davis. 

“We can do it,” said Pat. “I have watched 
the guards. They are apt to halt near the kit- 
chen to get a drink of water. Gibbon has put 
his gun down once or twice, to throw some 
wood on the fire, and Barth is just as careless. 
Come on.” 

They crept past the tents again, this time 
far in the rear, and reached the entrance to 
the ravine beyond the kitchen. The sentry beat 
ended just above the kitchen. Watching their 
opportunity, while the sentinels had their backs 
turned, they crept to the kitchen and lay still. 
The kitchen consisted of an inclosed space, with 
the stove on one side, the serving table on 
wooden horses on another; the other two sides 
were built of boxes of groceries, forming a sort 
of cupboard. The drinking water was in a 
pail on the serving table. It was not long be- 
fore Gibbon halted to get a drink. In doing 
so, he leaned his gun against the table. Pat 
nudged Davis. But they were not ready to act 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


109 


yet. Gibbon took up his gun and tramped 
on. He passed Barth who was up from the 
lower end of the camp. They saluted as they 
passed. Surely they were doing their duty 
faithfully. “Lucky” Davis crept a little to one 
side and returned in a moment with a few 
crackers, which he had found in one of the 
boxes. Pat and he ate and waited. At last the 
sentries faltered. They met near the kitchen, 
and evidently became thirsty at the same mo- 
ment. This was the opportunity Pat was wait- 
ing for. In a moment two guns were leaning 
against the table. 

Barth, turning to Gibbon, remarked, “Let’s 
throw some wood on the fire.” 

Together they turned aside to the fire, 
which was but a short distance away. Pat 
seized one gun and “Lucky” the other, and by 
running low and quietly they reached the ra- 
vine. The fire, now replenished, allowed them 
to see the return of the sentries. Barth and Gib- 
bon were searching hopelessly, along the table 
and on the ground. The guns were gone. Pat and 
Davis waited to see no more but fastening the 
guns in the branches of a tree, they crept care- 
fully back to their tents. 

The sentries hardly knew what to do. Some 
one must be about the camp. Possibly some 
tramps had wandered from the railroad. Per- 


no THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


haps they had tried to steal provisions, and 
had found opportunity to take the guns. They 
decided at last to tell Mr. Sumner. They made 
their v^ay to Headquarters, and aroused the 
sleeping Warden. He hastily threw on a dress- 
ing gown, and taking an electric candle, he 
made a tour of the tents. Every boy was there 
sleeping soundly. In tent six, occupied by Mc- 
Guire and Davis, there was a gentle snoring. 

Mr. Sumner was puzzled. He did not credit 
the theory of the tramps. He knew possible 
foragers nearer home who were capable of such 
conduct. Acting upon the principle that one 
success would prompt another effort, he de- 
termined to learn who might be the jokers. He 
directed the sentries to follow him. He went 
to the kitchen, found the flour barrel, and filled 
a pail with flour. Taking a scoop and a sifter, 
he carefully spread the flour over a square yard 
of ground right at the rear flaps of each tent. 
He did this very quietly and then returned to 
Headquarters. He told Barth and Gibbon to 
go back to the Sentry line without guns. 

Pat and “Lucky” secure in their tents chuckled 
over the success of their plan. It filled 
them with visions of greater deeds. Pat was 
the first to venture to look out, after Mr. 
Sumner had made his tour. The sentries were 
still on duty, and no one else was in sight. 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


III 


“Let’s steal Barth,” said Pat. “Why not?” 

Davis was reluctant at first as Barth was 
their tent mate. But Pat was persuasive. Again 
they crept forth, over the flour, and disap- 
peared in the grove. But a few minutes later 
Mr. Sumner made a hasty examination of the 
flour patches. At tent six he stopped. Sure 
enough, someone had crossed that flour evi- 
dently on hands and knees. He threw the light 
into the tent. Every cot was empty. 

With an amused smile, Mr. Sumner hurried 
to Headquarters and aroused Mr. Jackson. It 
was but a few minutes’ work to carry three 
cots and boxes from tent six to Headquarters. 
The tent was almost dismantled by this re- 
moval. Barth was then summoned to sleep at 
Headquarters in his own cot, and Gibbon was 
sent to bed. Mr. Sumner and Mr. Jackson 
took guns, and putting on their uniforms, made 
their way to the sentry line. It was quite dark 
now and they did not stir up the fire. 

Pat and Davis in the meantime, all uncon- 
scious of the aroused Wardens, made their plans. 
They reasoned that Barth would come to the 
lower end of the beat very hastily, as he would 
be nervous, and would hasten back to the safer 
quarter of the bonfire. They were quite sur- 
prised to notice as they approached that the 
guards had guns. 


1 12 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


“They have changed the guard,” whispered 

Davis. 

“No,” answered Pat. “It isn^t time. The 
boys have taken other guns.” 

“Let’s get these, too. We can’t steal Barth. 
He will call out.” 

Much to their surprise, the guard walked 
slowly down the beat. He was quite near 
now. He suddenly leaned his gun against a 
tree, and went a few feet away, and sat down. 
This was too much for Pat. Slowly he crept 
in the shadows to the tree, grasped the gun 
and crept back. The sentry seemed not to have 
noticed. Pat went about twenty feet, and had 
arisen in the dark shelter of some underbrush, 
when with a suddenness that nearly caused his 
hair to stand on end with fright, the gun left 
his hand, as if snatched away. It leaped toward 
the now alert sentry who said in a firm but not 
loud voice, “Halt.” 

But Pat did not halt. Neither did Davis. 
They hastened into the deeper gloom of the 
grove. Mr. Jackson pulled in his gun. The 
cause of its sudden release from Pat’s hand 
was a heavy cord, fastened near the hammer. 
Mr. Jackson simply pulled the cord at the 
right moment. 

Pat and Davis now returned, thoroughly 
frightened, to their tent. They crept along. 


THE SIGNAL CORPS 


113 


expecting any moment that the camp would 
be aroused. With great relief, they crawled 
through the flaps, and quickly tried to find 
their beds, before another Warden should ap- 
pear. It was in vain. There was no bed and 
no box. They crawled, astonished, about their 
tent. Not a thing could they find. 

“What do you make of this, Pat?” asked 
“Lucky.” 

“I think I am dreaming,” was Pat’s com- 
ment. “What’s become of our things?” 

“They may be in the tree top, too.” 

At that moment they heard the sound of 
some one passing. Peeping out they recognized 
Mr. Sumner, who was pacing up and down the 
street. 

“It’s all up,” said Pat. But the Warden did 
not stop. 

The boys stretched themselves on the ground 
and slept as best they could. 

Next morning, just as reveille sounded, the 
Wardens went to each tent and said: 

“Prepare for inspection.” This meant that 
the wall of each tent must be rolled up, and the 
occupants must stand, with guns at “present 
arms,” before the tent. 

Tent six presented a curious appearance. The 
walls were rolled up and two crestfallen boys, 
Pat and “Lucky,” with no guns, stood before 


1 14 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

an absolutely empty tent. The whole camp 
joined in a great laugh. 

Nothing was said, however, until later when 
the Warden read the forfeits. 

“McGuire, ten points for leaving tent at 
night and taking gun. 

“Davis, same. 

“Barth, five points for releasing gun while 
on guard. 

“Gibbon, same. 

“The guns must be returned before drill, or 
tent number six will remain as it is.” 

Before drill, Pat and Davis disappeared for 
a moment, but soon returned carrying two 
guns. 

That night they slept again in their own 
cots. 



THE VISITORS SPENT THE AFTERNOON VERY PLEASANTLY 




THE SHAM BATTLE 


IIS 


CHAFER X. 

VISITORS AND THE SHAM BATTLE. 

It was to be visitors’ 
day in camp. Lieuten- 
ant Miles had been or- 
dered to meet the morn- 
ing train with his pla- 
toon. They were to go 
without guns to the sta- 
tion. Before starting, 
Miles said to Mr. Sum- 
ner: 

^‘Will you permit me 
lo use the signal corps this morning?” 

Mr. Sumner looked puzzled, but said that he 
would. 

‘T should prefer, sir,” said Miles, ^^that our 
use of the signal corps be kept a secret.” 

Mr. Sumner promised to say nothing about 
it. Miles was a trustworthy boy, and Mr. 
Sumner knew that whatever his purpose was, 
it would be one of which he could approve. 

Art took the signal corps aside, and said: 

“See here, you wig-waggers, I want you to 
help me. I want one of you to stay here in 



ii6 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


camp and another to go to the top of the hill, 
and another to go with me to the station. You 
must send anything I give you, and give it to 
Jimmie Harding, I mean Lieutenant Hard- 
ing.” 

Sergeant Canfield promptly said that he 
would go to the station. He sent Brush to the 
top of the hill with Simpson, and stationed 
Norris in camp. 

Art Miles then sought out Harding. He found 
him polishing his shoes, brushing his clothes, 
and otherwise preparing for visitors. 

^‘Jimmie,” he said, “this is not a High School 
Commencement. You needn’t dress up. I 
hardly think Alice will come.” 

A look of disappointment came into Jimmie’s 
face. Alice Miles, Art’s sister, was a girl for 
whom Jimmie had a secret admiration. Art 
suspected it. 

“Go on,” replied Jimmie, recovering, “I 
don’t care who comes. I ought to polish these 
shoes anyway.” 

“I am going to the station, Jimmie. If she 
comes, I will tell her that you have dressed up 
and walked over to the village.” 

“If you tell any such fib. I’ll take care that 
Dorothy Potter has plenty of company all 
day.” 

Art laughed. He was hoping that Dorothy 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


1 17 

would come with the visitors, but he knew 
that Jimmie would be sufficiently occupied. 

‘‘Look here, Jimmie, I want you to help me. 
I am going to wig-wag some messages to camp 
from the station. You take them and deliver 
them.” 

“All right,” said Jimmie, “but,” with a grin, 
“don’t send up any false reports about ar- 
rivals.” 

Miles and his platoon were soon on the w’ay, 
and shortly reached the little station. There 
was no village at that point, only a few houses. 
He at once looked about for a convenient 
place for his signal man. An empty box car 
stood on a siding, and Miles climbed to the 
top. The crest o.f the hill was plainly visible 
a mile and a half away. Miles called Canfield 
and stationed him on the car. Canfield waved 
his signal flag, and in a moment the flag on 
the hill was seen against the sky. Brush had 
reached his station. Canfield took his position 
and soon the flag was waving. 

21 1-12-22-222-1 1 1-3. Ready. 

Both watched the flag on the hill. It began 
to dip. 

111-12-212. Yes. 

Miles took a pencil from his pocket and 
wrote on a sheet of paper he had brought with 
him: 


ii8 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


‘Warden Sumner, 

Platoon at station. 

Miles.” 

Soon the message was being waved, first to 
the top of the hill and then by Brush to Nor- 
ris in the camp. Jimmie, good as his word, 
wrote as Norris announced the letters. Jimmie 
then went to Headquarters, and found Mr. 
Sumner. He saluted and handed over the mes- 
sage. When Mr. Sumner read it he glanced 
up with a puzzled look. 

“What in the world is this? Who brought 
this back?” 

The delighted Jimmie exclaimed, “If you 
will step outside your tent, sir, you may see for 
yourself.” 

Outside, Jimmie pointed to the signalman 
on the hill, and to the other in the camp. 

“There’s one at the station, too.” 

“Direct your signalman to send the message, 
‘Congratulations from the Wardens to the sig- 
nal corps.’ ” 

While these messages were being sent the 
boys were waiting about the station. A train 
whistled in the distance. It was not the train 
from Portage, but from Cleveland. When it 
stopped a middle aged lady stepped off, fol- 
lowed by a younger one. They stood upon the 
platform of the station for several moments, as 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


119 

if undecided what to do. Finally the older 
lady gave such an appealing look toward 
Lieutenant Miles, that he stepped up, hat in 
hand. 

“We are looking for the ‘Young Crusader’ 
camp. Can you direct us?” 

“Certainly, madam,” answered the polite of- 
ficer, “I shall be glad to send a boy to show 
you the way.” 

“I am Mrs. Marshall,” she said, smiling, 
“and this is my daughter. We have come at 
the invitation of Mr. Kinsman. Is he at the 
camp? We first planned to visit here tomor- 
row. We have come unexpectedly. Could we 
let him know we are here?” 

“Yes, he is at camp, and I shall send him 
word so that he may expect you.” 

Art at once selected his most courteous pri- 
vate and told him to conduct Mrs. Marshall 
and her daughter to the camp. As they started 
on their way, he hastily climbed to the roof of 
the box car. 

“Quick,” he said, “send this message: 

“Mr. Kinsman — Mrs. Marshall and daugh- 
ter walking to camp from station. — Miles.” 

A few minutes later the train from Portage 
came in. A great party alighted: mothers, 
fathers, sisters and brothers of the boys. They 
were laden with baskets. Miles had his platoon 


120 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


drawn up at ‘‘Attention.” When the train 
had gone, and the group had halted waiting 
for some direction, Art stepped forward and 
said: 

“I am to have the pleasure of escorting you 
to the camp.” 

He saluted, looking directly into the eyes 
of his smiling sister. With a little bow that 
brought grins to the faces of the boys, and 
laughs from others, his sister saluted with a 
pretty toss of her hand to her forehead and 
said: 

“We are ready to go. Colonel.” 

Art struggled to control his features but 
joined in the laugh. He requested a moment’s 
delay, and again hastened to the car. 

“Take two messages: 

“(i.) Mr. Jackson. Prepare for invaders 
having well-filled baskets. — Miles.” 

“( 2 .) Harding, she is here, also D. — Art.” 

He then requested the ladies to give their 
baskets to the soldiers who had come to carry 
them. He himself selected Dorothy Potter’s 
basket as his burden, and the whole party made 
its way to the camp. 

In the meantime at camp the signals were 
attracting the interest of the boys. The most 
surprised man was Mr. Kinsman, who gave 
one glance at his message, and seizing his hat 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


I2I 


made off down the lane and into the road. Very 
soon he met the two ladies, and their soldier 
escort. He received a very warm greeting. 

“I must apologize, Mrs. Marshall, for not 
being at the station to meet you and Anna. 
You wrote me that you would be here tomor- 
row.” 

“We understand. We expected to surprise 
you. How did you get word of our coming, 
before we reached camp?” 

Mr. Kinsman explained about the signalling. 
After a few minutes Mrs. Marshall said, “I want 
to sit here for a little while by the roadside to 
see the beautiful country. You and Anna go 
on and leave the young soldier with me.” 

Anna Marshall was a tall girl, about twenty- 
four years old. Her attractive face and charm- 
ing manner revealed strong character and 
frank friendliness. Her beauty was enhanced 
by the glint of gold in her thick brown hair. 

As they walked on slowly, Mr. Kinsman 
said: 

“Anna, I think that it will not be very long 
before we can be married. I feel that you 
have been very generous to wait for me.” 

“I am willing to wait for you, John, as long 
as necessary. You may be sure of that,” anc! 
she gave his hand a warm clasp. 

They were passing a farm house with an old- 


122 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


fashioned garden at the side, and Anna ex- 
claimed, “Oh, see the roses. How beautiful 
they are. I love roses.” 

“Come on,” said her companion eagerly. He 
turned into the yard and went to the house. It 
took but a moment to arrange with the farmer’s 
wife, and they soon cut enough to fill a large 
basket. 

The farmer’s wife would take no pay. She 
looked so tired that the sympathetic Anna 
asked her if she were not well. 

“My husband is struggling hard with the 
farm. He can’t get help this summer. We 
are depending on our strawberries, and they 
are ready for the early market. We can sell 
all we have, in Cleveland, if we could get to 
the market. But we fear that they will all 
spoil. I am doing what I can, but with the 
cattle and the chickens and the crops we are 
worn out.” 

Anna said but little, but as they left she was 
absorbed in thought. John Kinsman noticed 
this and asked playfully: 

“What are you thinking of, Anna?” 

“Something pleasant; wait a minute, please.” 

Anna went back to the house, talked earnestly 
with the woman for a short time and then re- 
turned. 

“John, will you do me a favor?” 



FIRE!’ RINGS OUT THE SHARP COMMAND 









\0 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


123 


“Anything, gladly.” 

“Thank you. I will tell you what I want later 
in the day. I must consult mother.” 

They waited for Mrs. Marshall and then 
proceeded to the camp. It was not long be- 
fore other visitors arrived. The remainder of 
the morning was spent in showing the camp 
equipment to the interested guests. The boys 
slyly peeped into baskets. Joe Russell discov- 
ered a very delicious pie, and helped himself 
to a large piece. Tom came upon him as he 
was finishing it. 

“Ah, Tom, this tastes like a June day in an 
apple orchard.” 

“You will incite a riot, Joe, if you talk like 
that. Remember you are an officer.” 

“I need pie to keep my lip in shape for the 
bugle,” said the satisfied Joe. 

After dinner, which was quite different from 
the ordinary camp dinners, thanks to the visit- 
ors, a sort of restless inattention seized the boys. 
A few took their guns and sauntered off. For 
half an hour the visitors noticed that the boys 
jvere unwilling to go far from their tents. Sud- 
denly from the hill top came the sharp rattle 
of the firing of guns. The whole camp started 
up. The sentinel rushed to the Captain and 
shouted : 

“The camp is attacked.” 


124 the young crl sabers 

On the Captain’s order, “Assembly” was 
sounded. It took but a moment for the aroused 
company to line up on the camp street. The 
orders came thick and fast. Lieutenant Miles 
led his platoon in double time toward the 
grove, and Lieutenant Potter led his past the 
kitchen, toward the slope of the hill flanking 
the ravine. The firing on the hill was con- 
tinuous. It was now seen that the attacking 
party was intrenched near a big tree almost at 
the top of the hill. The camp defenders had 
disappeared. Suddenly they filed out from the 
bushes, which lined the open hill on either 
side, and with a quick run, crouching low, the 
two platoons formed a long line, half way up 
the hill. They now faced the enemy. 

“Fire!” rings out the sharp command. A 
rippling volley follows and the blue smoke 
arises from each spot where a soldier is lying. 
On command, they rush forward ten paces, fall 
flat, fire a volley and push forward again. The 
long line slowly converges toward the enemy’s 
ambush where the firing is continuous. 

Suddenly from the camp a Red Cross Squad 
hurries out with a stretcher and dashes up to 
the scene of conflict: a field hospital is estab- 
lished. In the meantime the attacking party 
has gathered and with a rush gains the hill crest 
with cheers of victory, capturing the squad in 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


125 


ambush. Both captors and captured, followed 
by the Hospital Corps, take their way back to 
camp. The rapid movements of the young 
soldiers, together with the rattle of the blank 
cartridges, the bright color of the flag and the 
blue smoke floating over the hillside, make 
a stirring scene. 

The younger members of the party of visitors 
looked on with awe when the company re- 
turned. There were many exclamations of de- 
light from the older ones. The first sham battle 
proved a success. 

The boys had their introduction to the new 
feature of the camp. It was nothing less than 
a candy store. It had been learned by the 
Wardens that the boys on their walks were go- 
ing to a country grocery two miles distant and 
were there buying such candy as the rural store 
had in stock. Several had been slightly ill as 
a result. 

There were but two courses open to the 
Wardens. One was to forbid the purchase of 
candy. This would be difficult to enforce; it 
would lead to deception and it would deprive 
the boys of a pleasure, which was harmless if 
regulated. Indeed a reasonable supply would 
fiave food value, and would serve as a wel- 
come addition to the plain camp fare. 

The other course was to provide the candy at 


126 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


the camp. This the Wardens decided to do. 
An order was sent to Portage, and a few hours 
later two large packing cases had arrived at 
Headquarters. They contained two score paste 
board boxes of simple wholesome candies. 
There was a variety great enough to suit every 
taste. 

The Wardens then made these stringent 
rules. Absolutely no candy was to be pur- 
chased outside the camp. Any disregard of 
this rule would be severely punished. The 
health of each boy was at stake. 

The store would be open for fifteen minutes 
at Headquarters twice a day, after dinner and 
after supper. No one might purchase more 
than five cents worth each time the store 
opened. The Wardens themselves were in 
charge. 

As it proved, they had a correct notion about 
the result. A boy getting five cents worth of 
candy would eat it within an hour after his 
meal. No harm resulted from this and no ap- 
petite lost its keen edge. 

The opening of the store was an event. Boys 
crowded about making their selection. Five 
cents would buy a great assortment. 

“Please give me two cents worth of choco- 
late, and two cents worth of gum drops, and a 
stick of peppermint.” 


THE SHAM BATTLE 


127 


‘Tlease give me a penny’s worth of cocoanut 
squares,” was the request of one economical boy. 

When the boys were satisfied, Dorothy Pot- 
ter and Alice Miles walked up to the table 
which served as a counter. 

“May we buy some candy, Mr. Jackson?” 

“Certainly, this is bargain day for the 
ladies.” 

“Oh, good! May we get ten cents worth 
each? Art and Jimmie are on duty, and have 
not been able to buy any. We want to sur- 
prise them.” 

“Let me see,” said Mr. Jackson. “I’ll look 
up the rules.” He pulled a little book from 
his pocket and pretended to read solemnly: 

“Rule 18 of the Young Crusaders.” 

“Should any one attempt to purchase ten cents 
worth of candy to share with any one else, such 
person shall be required to take a short walk 
about the camp with the Warden in charge.” 

The girls laughed. “We’ll do it.” 

They selected their candy, and Mr. Jackson 
placed it in two little sacks. 

“There is no charge. This is bargain day, 
remember. Now we’ll take our walk.” 

They strolled about the camp and Mr. Jack- 
son explained the discipline, the routine and the 
equipment. 

The afternoon was spent very pleasantly. 


128 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Jimmie Harding was especially attentive to 
dainty Alice Miles, and Art found pleasure in 
the companionship of Dorothy Potter. Together 
they climbed the hill, with a few others, to get 
the splendid view over the valley for miles 
around. 

When the candy store opened at' night, Mr. 
Sumner noticed Larry Brush hovering about, 
but buying nothing. 

“Larry, don’t you like candy?” Larry turned 
shyly away saying, “Oh, yes sir.” 

“Come here, Larry.” Larry obeyed. 

“Are you short of funds, son?” 

“I didn’t bring any money with me, Mr. 
Sumner.” 

“Well, Larry, I am not surprised. Never 
thought of a candy store in the woods, eh? By 
the way, I noticed that your set of fours does 
not get enough to do. I’ll have to set you boys 
to work. You come now and help me put away 
these boxes. I’ll make this your regular duty. 
Look here, Larry. I’ll make a bargain. You 
attend to this each day, and take your five cents 
worth, as clerk hire. How about it?” 

“Thank you, sir. I’ll be glad to do it,” and a 
little sweet tooth was satisfied all during camp. 

Mr. Kinsman and Anna Marshall took a 
long walk and discussed their plans for the fu- 



THE LONG LINE SLOWLY CONVERGES TOWARD THE ENEMIES’ AMBUSH 




THE SHAM BATTLE 


129 

ture. As the time came for the visitors to de- 
part he said: 

‘‘Anna, you were to give me the pleasure 
of doing you a favor.” 

“Yes, and I am about to ask it. Mother and 
I will remain for several days at the farm 
house where we stopped this morning.” 

Mr. Kinsman’s astonishment and delight 
were evident. “Now, what I want is this. Will 
you give me command of your company, next 
Monday?” 

John Kinsman was no less astonished at this 
request. But so animated was her manner, so 
eager her desire that he could but reply, 

“They are yours to command, dear.” 

That evening when he escorted mother and 
daughter to the farm house she unfolded her 
plan for the day on which she was to have com- 
mand. It did credit to her generous heart. In 
a moment Mr. Kinsman became enthusiastic 
and as he left her he said, “We shall not fail. 
Good-night.” 


130 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XL 

THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST. 

The excitement of vis- 
itors’ day and the unac- 
customed dainties which 
had been brought in the 
baskets, and eaten by the 
boys, made them restless 
and alert. A larger 
group than usual gath- 
ered about the fire after 
supper. There was much 
discussion of the events 
of the day and also of 
the coming prize drill for the boy best trained 
in the manual of arms. 

There was one boy in camp, Hamilton, who 
had an exalted idea of his own skill in this re- 
spect. He had been so sure of his ability to 
take the prize offered by the Wardens that he 
had not been reluctant to speak of it. 

‘‘You fellows will have no chance if I enter 
this contest,” was his joking comment. 

“Oh, go on, Hammy,” replied Ross. “You 
don’t know enough about a gun to hurt you.” 



THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 131! 

“Hammy never saw a gun until he joineJ 
the club,” added Barth. I 

“I guess I did,” was Hammy’s indignant an- 
swer. “I have handled more guns than all the 
rest of you put together.” : 

“Perhaps you were in the Revolutionary 
War, Hammy? Do you get a pension?” 

“My father was in the Civil War^ and he 
doesn’t get a pension, either.” 

“That makes you a veteran, Hammy.” 

“Well, I’ll show you fellows. You are a 
stuck up bunch,” he said, hotly. “If there’s 
any fellow here thinks he knows this manual 
of arms better than I do, let him make good.” 

“Don’t get mad. Hammy,” said Ross. But 
Hammy was mad. He got up, and strutted off 
to his tent, without a word. Hamilton was not 
exactly popular, because of his superior airs. 

“Say, do you fellows know that Hamilton 
went to Mr. Kinsman and said that unless he 
became an officer soon, he would leave camp?” 
It was Brown who spoke. 

“No, is that so?” “What a guy,” and other 
expressions came in chorus. 

Suddenly Dick Brewer jumped up. 

“I must see Blewie. Come on, Fred.” 

Fred Ewing, the boy addressed, got up, too. 
No one noticed that a moment later Jimmie 
Harding also disappeared in the direction of 


132 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

the cook’s tent. Brewer had quietly whispered 
to him to follow. 

Blewie was cleaning up the kitchen. When 
he was busy, he had no time for boys. His 
expansive moments were after work was done, 
and he reclined his great bulk in a low chair 
beside the little fire he kept burning near his 
tent. 

Ewing, Brewer and Harding settled down on 
the grass near that fire. They talked in whispers 
and very earnestly. Now and then they broke 
in a subdued laugh. That a conspiracy was 
on foot was apparent. 

Blewie soon finished his work and joined 
them. 

“Look a hyar, you boys. Caint you’uns poke 
a stick or two on that fire, while you ah wait- 
ing? I know you. You got your heads to- 
gether, contrapin’ some vill’ny. Ef yo’ try any 
of yo’ carnsarnedness on dis chicken. I’ll smote 
you.” And Blewie waved a big arm and 
smiled at the group, but with a questioning 
glance, as if to learn their real purpose. 

“Blewie,” asked Jimmie, “were you in the 
war?” 

Blewie raised an arm as if to ward off a 
blow, and ducked his head. 

“Say, chile, doan yo’ know dat whereber dar 
am rumors of wah, I git out and lose myself 


THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 133 

in de woods until dose rumors are disinfected 
by de statesmen, down in Washington? Neber 
had serious wah but once, and dat was ’tween 
me and some Eyetalians.” 

‘‘Tell us how it was, Blewie.” 

“Well, I doan reckon I’m very proud of it, 
but I’ll tell you. You know dat man in Port- 
age, dat digs up de streets every time dey gets 
’em nicely paved ; seems ’s though I doan come 
by his name, jes now.” 

“Was it Johnson, the contractor, Blewie?” 

“You am a fine guesser, son; dat am de very 
gemman hisself. I wuz walkin’ down de street 
and dis contracker, he stop me and sez, sez he: 
‘Hey, Barker, kin you all git me fo’ or five 
Eyetalians to dig a ditch for me tomorrow? 
I’ll give you two dollars.’ I reckoned I c’d 
git dose Eyetalians, cos Eyetalians were as thick 
out my way as weeds in a parson’s garden, so I 
says, ‘You’re on. Mister Johnsing.’ He tells 
me to bring ’em to de co’ner by de bank nex’ 
mornin’ at nine. 

“Well, I goes out and I gits five Eyetalians, 
and de nex’ mornin’ I brung ’em to de bank, 
’bout nine, and I looks up and down for dat 
contracker. Putty soon, when he didn’t come, 
I got sort of narvus, for dose Eyetalians were 
jabberin’ away, sounding like a difference of 
opinion at a woman’s club. When it comes 


134 the young crusaders 


half past nine, I jes felt it in my bones dat de 
contracker would neveh come, and dat he was 
makin’ a monkey of me. I says to myself, ‘Dis 
am suhtenly a doughnut. How’s I to break 
loose from dose Eyetalians?’ I waited a few 
minutes more. Den I said, ‘Boys, I’ll go tele- 
fun dat contracker.’ So I lit out and went down 
de street and slid into de alley, and hid myself 
in a liv’ry stable. 

“Putty soon I sent one of dose stable boys 
wot I knew, to discover if dose Eyetalians had 
dispersed theirselves. He reported dey was 
still thar, and still a jabberin’ and a lookin’ 
putty mad. So I dug under de hay, and waited 
thar till dahk. I didn’t want my ’natomy 
scalped by one of dose Eyetalian corn shuckers, 
wot dey carried. After dark I ambled out to 
my home, keepin’ in de shadows. Nex’ day I 
went on my vacation. One of my neighbors 
told me dat dose fellows war goin’ to black 
han’ me. 

“When I came back, I saw dat contracker, 
and stepped up and said: ‘Boss, I got youah 
Eyetalians. Whar’s my money?’ He gave me 
a look, and said, with a big laugh, ‘You’re easy. 
Barker. You should collec’ it from de Eye- 
talians.’ But I didn’t relish dat job, so I kept 
sort of quiet until dey got work on de railroad. 
Dat’s de nearest I came to ever bein’ in a war.” 



THE CAMP KITCHEN, ACROSS THE CREEK LAY AT THE EDGE 

OF A WOODED SLOPE” 




THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 135 

The boys asked Blewie for more stories, but 
he didn’t respond. They then told him of their 
plans, swearing him to secrecy. 

Next day they were unusually busy. During 
the leisure hours of the morning, and after the 
skirmish, they were gone from camp a long 
time. About half past four in the afternoon, 
there strolled into camp a group of farmer boys 
from the neighborhood. They loitered around, 
interested in the camp. Finally, Jimmie Hard- 
ing said to Frank Merril: 

‘^Sergeant Merril, assemble your set of fours, 
and escort these visitors about the camp. Let 
them see everything.” 

Merril did so. Art Hamilton was in the set 
of four boys. They approached the country 
lads, and Merril said he would be glad to show 
them the camp. One of the half dozen boys 
replied : 

‘T’d like to see one of them there guns.” 

‘^Hamilton, please let our guest inspect your 
gun.” 

The visitor took the gun, and examined it. 

‘‘Shucks,” he said, “you couldn’t hit a squir- 
rel with this gun.” 

“It’s not for shooting, but for drill,” replied 
Hamilton, haughtily. 

“For drill, eh,” slowly drawled the boy, who 
was dressed in a pair of overalls, wore a red 


136 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

neckerchief, and a rough straw hat on his head. 
His face and hands were somewhat dirty. He 
had been addressed as Eph by one of the 
smaller boys. 

“Yes, drill,” said Hammy smartly. 

“Do you mean that there throwing your gun 
around on your shoulder and such like?” 

“Yes, I mean the manual of arms.” 

“Let me see yuh do it.” 

A crowd had assembled by this time. There 
was nothing bashful about Hamilton. He was 
delighted to show his graceful drill to the rus- 
tics. He took the gun while Jimmie gave the 
orders. Rapidly he went through the manual 
of arms. 

“Say neighbor,” said Eph. “I think I kin do 
that. Let me try. Bedcher I can do it.” 

“Of course you can’t do it,” responded 
Hammy. 

“Tell yer what I’ll do. Ef I kin do it as 
well as you can, will yer give me one of them 
shiny buttons on yer coat? I’ll let the crowd 
be the judge.” Hammy amused, and somewhat 
disdainful, agreed. 

Most of the boys were watching and grin- 
ning. The farmer lads in the center of the 
group stood with open mouths. Even the War- 
dens had come out to see the fun. 


THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 137 

Hamilton stood with his gun ready. Eph 
turned and said slowly, 

“Which of you fellers will let me take his 
cannon?” 

Several were offered at once. Eph took one, 
and finally stood opposite Hammy, his shoul- 
ders slouched forward and his feet far apart. 
He still had the gun in both hands. 

“Ready,” said Harding. 

“Attention.” At this word Hammy smartly 
drew up into the alert position of the soldier. 
But Eph remained as he was. 

“Be that a command to do something with 
the gun?” 

“That means to take the position of a soldier, 
ready to drill,” explained Hammy. 

“Say, General,” drawled Eph, “give us that 
again will you, and blaze away.” 

Jimmie, ready to burst with restrained laugh- 
ter, again gave the command. Eph gave one 
look at Hammy and slowly stood erect, feet 
together and placed his gun at order arms. 

“Carry Arms.” No sooner was the command 
given than both boys with an alert movement 
brought the guns to the position of carry. 
Every one opened his eyes with amazement at 
the readiness and grace with which Eph exe- 
cuted the command. Hammy was dumb- 
founded. A slow red began to creep into his 


138 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

face. The orders came in quick succession. 

^‘Right Shoulder, Arms. 

“Carry, Arms. 

“Port, Arms. 

“Carry, Arms.” 

Rapidly they went through the manual. Eph 
drilled with astonishing ease and skill. Hammy 
was so confused at being in a real contest that 
he suddenly came to “carry” from “right shoul- 
der,” when the command was “port.” A great 
shout arose. “You’ve lost. Hammy.” “Give 
him the button.” “You’re all right, Eph.” 
“Hand over the button. Hammy.” 

The discomfited Hammy unfastened a button 
and with a sheepish grin handed it to Eph. 
Eph, as he took it, pulled away his hat and a 
big bunch of false red hair, and disclosed the 
black locks and familiar features of Fred 
Ewing. A shout of utter amazement arose 
from the whole crowd. 

Hamilton looked at Ewing absolutely 
stunned. Muttering “You’re too smart,” he 
went toward his tent. Fred received a small 
ovation. How he had reddened his dark eye- 
brows and made his mouth appear so large was 
a matter of deepest wonder. Fred explained 
that with the aid of an actor’s make-up box 
owned by Brewer he had done the business. 


THE IMPROMPTU CONTEST 139 

After a few minutes, Fred went after Ham- 
my, and holding out his hand said, 

“Hammy, old boy, you drilled beautifully. 
Here is your button. You got rattled for a 
minute. I hope you win the prize.” 

Hamilton took Fred’s hand and laughed, 
slapping Fred on the back. The crowd gave 
three cheers for Hammy, three for Fred and 
then took the genuine farmer boys, who helped 
in the plot, and gave them all the good things 
to eat they could find in the camp, answering 
scores of questions. And later, although he 
said no more about his skill. Hammy did take 
the prize at the contest. 


140 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XII. 

FUN AND FROLIC. 

On Saturday night the 
boys were in high spirits. 
They felt the satisfaction 
of having labored earn- 
estly during the week. 
‘‘Happy” Potter secured 
a squad dressed up in 
every conceivable sort of 
uniform and marched it 
about the camp, singing 
any old song that they 
knew. 

Emil Durr had caught a couple of small fish 
in the river and he was preparing them for his 
breakfast amidst much adverse criticism as to 
his skill as a fisherman. Fred Rawdon was 
practicing on a bugle in his tent, ambitious to 
become an understudy to Joe, and the weird 
sounds that came from that tent invited the 
wrath of the musical upon Fred’s head. 

Frank Merril and a few cronies upon the 
hillside were plotting some mischief. Their 
plot evidently was carried out, for later, after 



FUN AND FROLIC 


141 

taps, Tent 4 suddenly collapsed upon the 
struggling occupants, the tent ropes having 
been loosened. 

The Red Cross squad was practicing emer- 
gency runs with its stretcher, which consisted 
of two poles and a blanket. To make the 
stretcher, the blanket was placed on the ground, 
and the poles laid across so that the blanket 
was divided into three equal sections. One side 
was then folded over the pole onto the center, 
and the other side similarly folded. The ‘Vic- 
tim” was placed on the blanket thus folded, and 
the weight of his body kept the blanket from 
slipping. Two boys, one at each end of the 
poles, easily carried the whole weight. 

The nights had grown cold and some of 
the boys had complained that they had not 
been kept warm by their blankets, so Art Miles 
and Jimmie Harding were conducting an out- 
of-door instruction, as to how to make up a cot. 
They had taken a cot out into the street and 
some boys were gathered about it. 

“You see, children,” began Art, assuming the 
attitude of a well known High School teacher, 
which raised a laugh, “the trouble is that you 
do not understand that you must have as much 
clothing beneath you as above you, on a cot. 
The cot has no warm mattress. 

“Now that you have learned that point, chil- 


142 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

dren, we will proceed. You take blanket No. i 
and you will see that it is twice as wide as the 
cot. Place it unfolded on the cot so that half 
of it hangs over the front edge and onto the 
ground.” Here Art, with Jimmie’s aid, suited 
his action to his word. 

“You have learned that thoroughly! To 
proceed. You take blanket No. 2 and place it 
in the same manner, one half on the cot and 
the rest of it hanging to the ground behind the 
cot; this puts two folds of blankets beneath 
you. 

“You now take your sheet and place it as 
you placed blanket No. 2; having done so you 
fold blanket No. 2, with the sheet, back over 
the cot; thus blanket No. 2, lined by the sheet, 
forms a pocket. 

“Having proceeded thus far, you step to the 
end of your cot, and fold under about six inches 
of blanket No. 2 and sheet, so that the chilly 
blasts will not strike your tootsie wootsies. 

“You are now ready to retire. Come here, 
Pat.” 

They placed Pat, clothes and all, in the fold 
of blanket No. 2. 

“Now you will reach out and carefully draw 
the part of blanket No. i from the ground 
and fold it over blanket No. 2, and likewise 
over yourself. You are now ready for sweet 


FUN AND FROLIC 


H3 

dreams. On three sides you are hermetically 
sealed, with no place where Jack Frost may 
creep in and make goose flesh, to betray your 
true nature.” 

In spite of Art’s manner the lesson was sin- 
cere, and the boys learned something worth 
knowing. 

In the meantime Pat between the blankets 
began to give every sign of going to sleep. 

“Get out of here, ye nuisances,” called Pat 
as the boys began to prod him. “Can’t ye let 
a fellow sleep?” 

The boys took hold of the cot and turned 
it on edge, rolling Pat out on the ground. He 
arose pretending great anger and began to 
strike out left and right. Every one stayed out 
of reach. Pat suddenly lunged and seized Fred 
Ewing. He hurled him upon the blankets and 
quickly rolled him up in them. 

“Quick, quick, Hospital Corps,” called Pat. 

The Hospital Corps, practicing nearby, raced 
to the spot. 

“Here is a raving maniac, hold him fast.” 
Entering into the fun they seized the struggling 
boy and quickly placed him on the stretcher. 
Three boys on either side held him fast. They 
ran toward the kitchen. 

“He’s fainted,” shouted Pat, “bring water.” 

Ewing struggled to get free. Ross got a bucket 


144 the young crusaders 

of water and Pat was about to hurl it on Ewing 
when Mr. Kinsman appeared. This stopped 
Pat, and the momentary diversion permitted 
Ewing to free himself. He rushed for Pat and 
tripped him. Pat and the bucket of water tum- 
bled to the ground. Ewing laughing, by this 
time, called out, 

“First down, ten yards to gain,” as Pat arose 
grinning. 

Mr. Kinsman said, “That will do, boys, you 
must not carry a joke too far.” 

“Ah! it’s a good old time we’re having, Mr. 
Kinsman,” said Pat, and he slapped Fred 
heartily on the back. 

So about the camp there were pranks and 
fun until bed time. 

Sunday morning dawned clear and beautiful. 
The usual routine was omitted, except the nec- 
essary work of cleaning the camp. Many visi- 
tors were expected for the day. 

After breakfast Mr. Sumner noticed a group 
of boys near one of the tents. They were laugh- 
ing heartily at something going on within. He 
stepped over to see what it was and a ludicrous 
sight met his eyes. There was “Happy” Potter 
dressed up to represent a barber. He had put on 
the white coat of his pajamas to represent a 
barber’s coat, and he was flourishing a brush 
of lather. Inwood was seated on a camp chair. 


FUN AND FROLIC 


HS 

a towel about his neck. Potter rapidly spread 
the lather over Inwood’s face, not being care- 
ful to avoid his mouth, and then he drew out 
of his box a razor. Quickly he scraped it over 
Inwood’s smooth cheek. That blood did not 
follow was probably due to the condition of 
the razor. “Happy” then snatched away the 
towel, dumped Inwood off the chair and called 
out “Next.” 

Someone said Durr needed a hair cut. 

It was only too true, and Durr was hastily 
pushed to the chair. He submitted, seeing it 
was useless to resist. Quickly Potter put on 
the towel and taking a pair of scissors and a 
comb actually began to make inroads upon 
Durr’s overlong locks. “Happy” was cautious, 
however, and took off but a little at a time. 
He proceeded carefully, and soon Durr had a 
hair cut, which if not artistic, was at least an 
improvement. 

“Happy” then proceeded to pour witch hazel 
on Durr’s head, and to rub it, in a really pro- 
fessional style. His exaggerated imitations 
greatly amused the watching boys. 

No one else was found who needed attention 
from the barber, so the shop closed for the day. 

The visitors came about ten. Mothers and 
fathers, brothers and sisters, cousins and aunts, 
came swooping down upon the camp. Anxious 


146 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

mothers looked about for damp bed clothing, 
while small brothers examined the guns. There 
was also much visiting and unpacking of 
baskets. . The boys had their dinner early and 
then the tables were turned over to the guests. 
Blewie was put to rout by a group of mothers 
who took command of the kitchen, made coffee 
and warmed up the contents of their baskets. 
Dinner for the guests was soon served. 

After dinner there was a service under the 
trees near the grove. The Rector of the Church 
of our Saviour at Portage, who had many 
friends among the boys, had come with the 
visitors and he conducted the service. Famil- 
iar hymns were sung and Evening Prayer was 
said. Prayer Books had been provided for all. 
The Rector preached a short sermon. 

The visitors returned to town about half 
past three, several of the boys going to the 
train with them. 

Mr. Kinsman and Mr. Jackson sat by Head- 
quarters discussing the day’s events. 

‘‘Sunday is a hard day in camp. The boys 
miss the usual routine and drill.” 

“Yes, and it will be hard to occupy them 
from now on.” 

“They seem to be rather listless now that 
the visitors have gone. They find the time 
dragging.” 



THE YOUNG CRUSADERS AT ‘CHURCH 





I 


I 

» t 


r 

I 











• ^ . 

¥ 

» 


V 











^ • 


• •• 


'v 




4 i 


^ '' I 


I ^ 


\ ' .;. •• ' 


f i * ' » . i . 

■’. J'. . ■ .''-J ,. ■ 

v;./ ' •» 










. * 

“ V 


T< 


I 


N 

'4 . ■ 


i[r4.r^'4 ft..i 


‘ •■ ti • . 



V’ - 


■ i 




s. 


-) . 

:. ^ . ^ ■*. ', A, 


^ ■■' V. ..' V,'|. . 

, * 1! I .V 





•*'ir 

*•• j 


• ) : 


*r’ 


■ ivr >• ■',.* 

• ■*" L 

S '\4 


:tTi 


« 


I-.-* 

*1^ 


» .1 i 


r ' 


FUN AND FROLIC 


H7 


said Mr. Kinsman, “it is worse for 
boys to be idle than occupied decently. I shall 
propose something. ‘Dick,’ ” he called to 
Brewer, who was walking aimlessly about the 
camp street. “Why don’t you go swimming?” 

Dick’s face lighted up. “May we?” 

“Surely,” said Mr. Kinsman. Dick hurried 
off with the news. In a moment the listless- 
ness vanished and they all started for the 
swimming hole. Mr. Jackson went with them. 

In the evening the camp resumed its usual 
interests, but Mr. Kinsman took a chair out 
by the fire, and a group of boys soon surrounded 
him and asked questions and listened to his ex- 
periences. 

“Yes,” he said in answer to a question, “I 
played baseball in college. I was not a good 
hitter but I had a temporary reputation as one. 
It came in this way. It was in my Freshman 
year, and I had just made the team. We were 
playing with the State University. The score in 
the ninth was 3 to i in their favor. There was a 
man on first and two out when I came to bat. 
Everyone thought it was all over, and they were 
getting up to leave. A freshman was not the 
man to save the game. I knew that the next 
batter was one of the best on the team. I 
thought that if I could get a base on balls he 
would have a chance, so I waited. The pitcher 


148 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

for ‘State’ pitched two balls, and then one 
strike; another ball and another strike made it 
three balls and two strikes. The next ball 
pitched would either give me the base or 
strike me out and lose us the game. As it came 
I saw it was going to be good so I swung at it. 
By good luck I hit it and sent it between first 
and second for a base hit. The crowd then 
gave a cheer, and began to take interest. The 
next batter struck out and we were left on the 
bases. We lost the game but I won a reputa- 
tion. I lost it at the next game. 

“That reminds me of the story of our pitcher 
and how he held office,” he continued. “Our 
college was in a small village surrounded by 
farms. Every year each voter was expected 
to work on the roads. Many of the college 
boys were voters but disliked this duty. They 
evaded it whenever they could, but sooner or 
later they were caught by the township officials 
and fined. This made bad feeling between the 
students and the officials, so whenever a student 
indulged in some college prank he was caught 
by the village constable and brought before 
the justice of the peace. The sentence was gen- 
erally a heavy fine. The boys grew tired of 
this, and at the next election they had their own 
candidate for justice. It was the pitcher of 
our team. Every voter in the college, regardless 


FUN AND FROLIC 


149 


of politics, voted for him and he was elected. 

“We thought we were safe then, but we found 
that he was taking the job seriously, and we 
were fined as usual but not unjustly as before. 
He made a good official and managed to re- 
store peace between the boys and the township 
authorities.” 

Mr. Kinsman related many other experiences 
to the eager boys. Finally “Tattoo” sounded 
and the camp became quiet for the night. 

Ted Potter had gone to Dick Brewer’s tent 
to spend the night, exchanging cots with In- 
wood. As they lay, buried to their chins in 
the bed clothes, Ted said in a low voice: 

“It gets awfully quiet around here when 
everyone has gone to bed.” 

Dick raised himself up on his elbow. 

“Do you hear the rumble of that train, Ted? 
It must be almost to Portage. It passed here 
a long time ago.” 

“Sounds carry a long distance on a night like 
this.” 

“I sometimes wonder how it would feel to be 
all alone in this little tent, at midnight.” 

“You would wish yourself back in Portage, 
Dick,” was Ted’s decision. “Those old trees 
would cast shadows that would seem like ghosts 
dancing all over the place.” 

Dick got up and raised the flap of the tent. 


150 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

^‘Look out here, Ted. Don’t the stars seem 
nearer to us out here in the woods? Seems 
as if they were right over the tree tops. It 
always sets me thinking to look at the stars on 
a night like this.” 

Ted had arisen and was staring out of the 

tent. 

“I have been wondering, Dick, how it is 
that we kids can be out here, with all these old 
trees and see these stars every night, and never 
give them a second thought. It must have taken 
an awful long time to make this old world. Do 
you think a boy is worth as much as a star?” 

“I guess he is, Ted. They haven’t a heart 
to love any one with. They haven’t any father 
and mother, who take care of them. It seems 
to me that a boy who has all these things has 
had a good deal more done for him than a 
star.” 

“But they keep on shining, Dick, and we 
die.” 

“That’s because shining is all they can do. 
But we get better, and we know more as we 
grow older. Nothing makes any impression on 
a star. Everything around us helps us. See 
what we have learned since we came here, 
That looks useless unless we were going to out- 
live the stars. Why, Ted,” and Dick sat on 
the edge of his cot, “do you think that your 


FUN AND FROLIC 


151 

mother isn’t going to love you to the end of 
eternity? We are going to school in this world 
to learn what’s going to help us when we die.” 

Ted stood a long time in silence. He said at 
length slowly, “I guess you are right. But we 
don’t seem to live up to that, do we? We sort of 
take better care of our things, this old gun for 
instance, than we do of some of these other 
boys. And yet they are going to live on when 
this old gun is rusted away. That isn’t right.” 

‘^Of course it isn’t right. That’s why we are 
here. We are learning to help take care of each 
other. This camp isn’t for fun. Do you think 
you will ever forget the kids that are here? 
You won’t. Some of these kids are having a 
piece of Ted Potter and Dick Brewer woven 
into their characters in this camp, and we’re 
getting a piece of Warren and Harding and 
Miles. The fellow that’s giving his best is the 
one that’s doing most for our club. Those fel- 
lows will have something of this camp in them 
when those stars are cold.” 

Ted made his way back to his cot. ^‘That 
means we’ve got to make a good contribution, 
doesn’t it, Dick, old boy? Well, you’re doing 
it. I’m cold. Good-night, Dick.” 

“Good-night, Ted. I am glad we’ve got a 
guard out there.” 

“So am I.” 


152 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XIIL 

STRAWBERRIES AND UNEXPECTED GUESTS. 

Early Monday morn- 
ing Anna Marshall ap- 
peared in camp. The 
company was at break- 
fast. Immediately after 
breakfast “ Assembly ” 
was sounded and the 
boys wondered what was 
to happen. Mr. Kins- 
man stepped before the 
company and said: 

“Miss Marshall has 
asked as a special favor that she have control of 
the company for one day. I have granted this 
request and we stand ready to do as she asks.” 

Contrary to all military discipline, there was 
a loud clapping of hands. Miss Marshall had 
made herself a general favorite with the boys, 
by her simplicity, her good nature and her in- 
terest in the camp. She had visited each tent 
on Sunday and each boy had been introduced 
to her. It was with a very bright face and 
glistening eye, that she received the announce- 




STRAWBERRIES 


153 

ment and listened to the applause. She stepped 
to Mr. Kinsman and said quietly, 

‘‘Will you please explain what I want to do?” 
“If you insist,” was his smiling reply. “Miss 
Marshall has found a family in this neigh- 
borhood in a serious predicament. Mr. Win- 
ter, who lives in the house on the road to the 
station has been unable to get sufficient help in 
his garden this spring. He has a mortgage on 
his house nearly paid. The last payment of one 
hundred and fifty dollars falls due on Friday. 
He has no means of meeting it. He has an 
abundant crop, but there is no one to gather 
it. If he could obtain sufficient help he could 
easily sell his products and pay off his mort- 
gage. But he cannot get workers. Miss Mar- 
shall and her mother have been staying there 
and Miss Marshall has thought of a plan by 
which we can assist. Everyone who is willing 
to spend this day as Miss Marshall wishes, will 
take one step forward.” 

As one man, the whole company stepped for- 
ward. Even the Wardens did so. Then Miss 
Marshall went to Captain Warren, saying, 

“I thank you and your company. If you will 
follow me we shall soon be at work.” 

She started toward the lane. Quickly Cap- 
tain Warren gave the necessary commands and 
the company followed. Only the guard was 


1 54 


THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


left at the camp. They swung into the road 
and toward the station. Upon reaching the 
farm house, they halted. Mr. Winter was at 
the large gate. This he opened and the com- 
pany marched into the yard. 

Upon halting Mr. Kinsman explained their 
work. Mr. Winter had a great field of straw- 
berries. They had ripened but there was no 
one to pick them. He had an agreement with 
a Cleveland firm of commission merchants. 
They would take every berry he could send 
and pay twelve cents a quart for them. Miss 
Marshall had sent for quart boxes. A great 
pile of them was upon the front porch of 
the farm house. The boys were to go to the 
field and pick berries. 

Quickly and systematically it was arranged. 
Each boy was to take a quart box and as soon 
as he filled it, he was to give it to one of the 
Wardens who would place it in a convenient 
crate and give the picker a new box. As each 
crate was filled, Mr. Winter would carry it to 
the yard and load it upon a wagon. 

No game was ever undertaken with more zest 
than this contest against the mortgage. Mr. 
Winter was a quiet man who fully appreciated 
all that was being done for him. He tried in 
every way to show his gratitude. Mrs. Winter 
sent out plate after plate of ginger bread, and 


STRAWBERRIES 


155 

pitchers of fresh milk. All the little Winters 
were picking too. Soon the full boxes began 
to come in. Miss Marshall went into the field 
and spoke to each boy, urging him to be careful 
of the vines and to leave no ripe berries. 

The first crate was filled, and a cheer arose 
as Mr. Winter carried it to the wagon. The 
field was very large, for Mr. Winter had cen- 
tered his whole interest in his berries. 

Very soon Leo Inwood appeared before Miss 
Marshall, with a very large berry. As he pre- 
sented it, holding it on the stem, he said, 

^Tlease eat it. Miss Marshall.” But Anna 
had a better idea. 

“May I keep it for awhile and see if you can 
bring me a larger one?” 

Leo gracefully assented. Soon another boy 
appeared with one that was larger than In- 
wood’s. Miss Marshall accepted this also. A 
contest then began, and large berries began to 
accumulate. Anna got a box, and placed them 
all in it. Each new berry was compared with 
the largest in the box. Former champions were 
quickly replaced at first, by larger rivals. But 
Joe Russell brought one huge berry that bade 
fair to hold the first place, for all time. Soon 
the box was filled, and presented by Mr. Win- 
ter to Mrs. Marshall. 

Meanwhile the crates were being filled, and 


156 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

soon the wagon was loaded. Mr. Jackson vol- 
unteered to take it to the station and get the 
berries off to Cleveland on the noon train. A 
shipping tag was tied to each crate. Mr. Jack- 
son accomplished this errand and was jogging 
back to the farm in the one horse wagon. He 
had on his old clothes that day, with a blue 
flannel shirt, and a big straw hat borrowed 
from Mr. Winter. The usually well dressed 
Warden seemed to be one of the sons of the soil. 

As he was thinking of the possible result of 
the day’s work, a great touring car came whirl- 
ing up behind him. He drew to one side, but 
the touring car did not pass. On the contrary, 
it came to a stop, beside Mr. Jackson’s humble 
wagon. 

In the car were two men, one very fat and 
jolly looking, the other grave and dignified. 
There were also three ladies. Mr. Jackson 
reined in his horse and lifted his hat politely. 
The large fat man stood up in the car and with 
an elaborate bow, and a very cordial smile ad- 
dressed Mr. Jackson as follows: 

‘‘Noble son of mother earth, would you be so 
kind as to delay your chariot and prancing steed 
long enough to inform us if this is the road 
to the prosperous and beautiful city of the lakes, 
Cleveland?” 

One of the girls, with an embarrassed smile, 


STRAWBERRIES 


157 

which Mr. Jackson did not fail to see, remon- 
strated, 

“Oh father, don’t talk like that.” 

This interruption gave Mr. Jackson a mo- 
ment to recover his self possession. Leaning 
toward the automobile, and putting his hand 
beside his ear, he said with a strong nasal 
accent: 

“Hey?” 

“Ah,” said the jovial fat man, “I must speak 
louder.” He raised his voice somewhat, and 
said: 

“Would’st be so kind, true, generous hearted 
countryman, as to inform five forlorn wayfarers 
if this stately boulevard is the proper road to 
yonder port of Cleveland?” 

Mr. Jackson assumed a puzzled look, 
scratched his head, cast a sly glance at the girl 
who had spoken, and slowly pulled a few 
matches from his pocket. He held them out, 
with a nod, saying: 

“Always glad to accommodate a stranger.” 

Everyone laughed. The fat man took them 
with a bow, and handed one to each of his 
party. Then he stepped closer, and resting his 
hands on the side of the car, leaned over toward 
the Warden. 

“Generous sir,” he almost shouted, while Mr. 
Jackson again put his hand to his ear, and 


IS8 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

leaned far toward the questioner, “I appreciate 
your courtesy. But may I ask again, strong son 
of earth’s turbulent plowed fields, if in pursu- 
ing our way, o’er hill and dale upon our present 
course, we shall be greeted by the breezes that 
blow softly over Erie’s gentle waves upon the 
stately city of Cleveland?” 

Mr. Jackson was leaning nearer and nearer. 
When this speech was ended, he arose, made a 
profound bow, and looking first at the fat man, 
and then at the attractive daughter, he began, 

“Wayfarers through our peaceful valley, why 
should you hasten to the sordid crowded streets 
of clanging cities? Know you not the words 
of Keats? 

“To one who has been long in city pent 
’Tis very sweet to look into the fair 
And open face of heaven, to breathe a prayer 
Full in the smile of the blue firmament. 

“Restrain your restless car, oh kindly court- 
ier, whose gentle words retain the glow of the 
golden days of great Elizabeth. Learn from 
a simple rustic the art of quietude. This road 
leads not to Cleveland, but for me it leads to 
luncheon, and a happy hour.” 

The young ladies clapped their hands, and 
the fat man laughed loud and heartily. He 


STRAWBERRIES 


159 


held out a hand, which was cordially grasped 
by Mr. Jackson, who was now blushing. The 
grave man was looking at him with interest 
and the elderly lady, evidently the mother of 
the young ladies, was smiling. 

“Well met, young man,” he said. “Where 
did you learn to do that?” 

“From you, I think,” replied Mr. Jackson. 

“You’re beaten, Hoyt,” said the grave man. 
“Better pay up.” 

^ “I will. Will you take lunch with us? We 
have a basket full of things. My name is 
Hoyt, and this is my wife, Mrs. Hoyt, and my 
daughters. Miss Marion and Miss Catherine 
Hoyt. This is Mr. Patterson.” 

Mr. Jackson bowed, and said, “My name is 
Jackson. I should be pleased to take lunch 
with you, but my duty calls me. May I sug- 
gest that a mile farther on will be found a very 
delightful place for you to stop for your lunch- 
eon?” 

“By all means,” said Mr. Hoyt. “We shall 
be glad to follow your advice, especially if it 
will give us the pleasure of your company.” 

“Your defective hearing must be a great an- 
noyance to you, Mr. Jackson,” said the mis- 
chievous Miss Marion. 

“Oh, it is only defective when my sense of 
sight is unusually alert.” He paused a moment. 


i6o THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


and then added, ‘‘You know that such a fine 
automobile is a rare sight in the country.” 

Miss Marion looked at him doubtfully. 
Then Miss Catherine took up the question. 

“Do you find it pleasant to live in the coun- 
try?” 

The Warden looked troubled, but replied: 

“One of its pleasures is lack of lamp posts.” 

“How is that?” 

“There is no place for street signs. Every- 
one has to stop and make inquiry as to high- 
ways.” 

By this time they were all ready to start. The 
horse trotted on ahead and the automobile fol- 
lowed. Turning in at Mr. Winter’s gate they 
came upon a festive scene. The boys were 
eating lunch on the lawn. Anna Marshall was 
talking with animation about the morning’s 
work. She had fascinated the whole company 
by her charm and inspired them with her en- 
thusiasm. As the automobile swung into the 
yard, all turned in surprise. Anna gave one 
long look, and then ran forward. 

“Why of all people! How did you come 
here?” 

“Bless my heart, it’s Anna Marshall.” 

There were excited greetings and introduc- 
tions. The Hoyts were old friends, and they 
joined the party on the lawn. Mr. Hoyt, glow- 


strawberries 


i6i 


ing with enthusiasm, asked scores of questions 
of Mr. Kinsman. Mr. Jackson had driven 
toward the barn and did not return at once. 
When he did appear, he was quite a different 
looking fellow from the rustic whom they had 
seen but a few minutes before. His hair was 
combed, and his hands washed clean of straw- 
berry stains. His cravat was neatly tied and his 
clothes brushed. As he approached Mrs. Hoyt 
said, “It is too bad that young man is deaf.’’ 

Mrs. Hoyt was startled by the effect of her 
remark. Mr. Hoyt, Mr. Patterson and the 
girls burst into laughter, while the others be- 
gan asking questions. Confusion reigned for a 
moment. But Mr. Jackson was equal to the 
occasion, and said, smiling: 

“I am deaf only when the emergency seems 
sufficiently urgent, Mrs. Hoyt.” 

“Who is Mr. Jackson, Anna?” whispered 
Miss Marion. “Is he the farmer’s son?” 

“No indeed,” laughed Anna. “He is a Ken- 
yon man, and the teacher of chemistry in the 
Portage High School.” 

“Oh!” said the surprised Marion. 

Soon Mr. Patterson and Mr. Winter were in 
earnest conversation. Mr. Patterson was a 
banker of Cleveland, a man of good judgment, 
and quick decision. When he had joined the 
party again, Mr. Winter whispered something to 


i 62 the young crusaders 


his wife, who then quietly drew Anna to one 
side. 

^^Miss Marshall, you have brought us good 
luck. Mr. Patterson is going to send his horses 
here for the winter. He made a very generous 
offer, and has paid half the money down. Mr. 
Winter did not want to take it, but Mr. Patter- 
son insisted. It looks as if our mortgage might 
at last be paid off,” and tears came to her eyes, 
as she gave Anna’s hand an affectionate grasp. 

The whole party had decided to spend the 
day, and the work of picking berries was re- 
sumed after lunch. The morning record was 
four hundred and fifty quarts. Mr. Hoyt of- 
fered a prize of five dollars if they could beat 
that record in the afternoon. The young ladies 
borrowed aprons and helped. Soon the large 
form of Mr. Hoyt was seen among the plants, 
endeavoring to help. Faster and faster came 
the boxes. Mr. Jackson made a second trip to 
the station, but not alone. Miss Marion Hoyt 
happened to be on the wagon when the horse 
was put between the shafts, and he had cau- 
tioned her: 

“You must keep very quiet and not scare the 
horse, while we are hitching up. Please do not 
move until I say the word.” 

Mr. Jackson forgot to say the word, and the 


STRAWBERRIES 163 

obedient Marion found herself being driven 
along the now familiar road. 

At five o’clock Joe blew his bugle, and the 
boys came in from the field. They were formed 
in line by the call of “Assembly.” The visitors 
all gathered. Mr. Hoyt, his face beaming, 
stepped forward. 

“Valiant Knights, defenders of our glorious 
flag, models of chivalry, could any one under 
these circumstances — ” 

Here he paused for a moment. Mr. Jackson 
like a flash, said: 

“Tell me the way to Cleveland?” 

Mr. Hoyt gave Mr. Jackson a look of un- 
derstanding, and went on. 

“Could any one fail to be aroused by this 
spectacle? In short, you have picked over one 
thousand quarts of berries; you have won the 
five dollars ; you have made one family happy, 
and you have treated your own features to a 
strawberry decoration which would do credit 
to the famous mural decorators of ancient 
Pompeii. I salute you.” 

Mr. Kinsman then said, “You will be glad 
to know the results of your efforts. The berries 
will bring one hundred and forty dollars. The 
prize will increase this to one hundred and 
forty-five dollars. We have raised all but five 


i 64 the young crusaders 

dollars, and that means success to our efforts.” 

Here Pat McGuire seemed to be struggling 
with some inner fever. He twisted and turned 
and finally saluted. He caught Mr. Kinsman’s 
eye, and ventured to beckon to him. Mr. Kins- 
man went to Pat, who whispered: 

“Why not put in the five dollars I received 
from the Swiss movement man?” 

Mr. Kinsman stepped back and announced — 

“I shall add to this fund the sum of five dol- 
lars which Private McGuire obtained as a re- 
ward of merit, for kindness to a total stranger. 
This makes the amount complete. Mr. Winter, 
we are happy to congratulate you on the im- 
mediate prospect of owning your home and 
farm free from incumbrance.” 

The embarrassed and grateful Mr. Winter 
could say nothing but “Thank you” in a chok- 
ing voice, while Mrs. Winter was wiping her 
eyes with her apron. 

The company marched back to camp and the 
visitors went off in the automobile promising 
to return in a few days to inspect Camp Cru- 
sader. 

As Mr. Kinsman was leaving, Anna Mar- 
shall came to him and said, “John, do you re- 
member the words in my little book ‘Friend- 
ship’?” 



THOSE OLD TREES AND HILLSIDES WILL ALWAYS SEEM 
UNLIKE OTHER TREES AND HILLSIDES” 





STRAWBERRIES 165 

“ ‘To seek the good of men, is to seek the glory 
of God; 

^ ^ ^ ^ 

“ ‘The primal duties shine aloft like stars, 

The charities that soothe and heal and bless 
Are scattered at the feet of men like flowers; ” 

“Yes, Anna, I remember; but I remember 
also that you suggested this day’s work out of 
the fulness of your good heart.” 


i66 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XIV. 

PLANNING THE ATTACK. 

Upon the following 
day there was a long 
conference between the 
Wardens and the Cap- 
tain with his three lieu- 
tenants. The boys were 
somewhat perplexed. 
Was some breach of dis- 
cipline to be soundly 
punished or had the 
camp funds failed? 
There had been a good 
deal of noise during the night. The boys had 
been restless from too great a devotion to ripe 
strawberries. Two boys had left their tents and 
had tied a cord across the guard line. This 
had caused the guard “to lose his dignity, as 
well as his uprightness,” as Pat McGuire de- 
scribed it next day. 

But the conference was for a far different 
purpose. Plans had been made for one-half 
the company to make an attack upon the camp, 
whieh would be defended by the other half. 




PLANNING THE ATTACK 167 

^We are to attack the camp between ten 
o’clock and sunset tomorrow?” asked Captain 
Warren. 

“Yes,” answered Mr. Sumner, “you and 
Lieutenant Harding with the first platoon and 
six boys from Lieutenant Miles’ platoon, but 
Miles will remain with the defenders.” 

“Art,” said Tom to Miles, “here is where 
friendship ceases for a day.” 

“But will be renewed after you are captured 
as an invader, Tom,” answered Miles with a 
smile. 

“Captain Warren,” resumed Mr. Sumner, 
“You will take your command from camp at 
five this evening. Have each boy take a blan- 
ket, and in his knapsack a day’s rations. You 
will have supper before you go. Up to ten 
tomorrow the defenders will not leave camp, 
and will make no effort to learn where you 
have gone. After that hour you may attack.” 

“Mr. Sumner,” asked Jimmie Harding, “do 
I understand that a successful attack means that 
we get our boys back into camp without dis- 
covery?” 

“Yes, that is right. You are to attack by in- 
vading the camp before you are discovered. 
For the purpose of this campaign the camp 
bounds will be enlarged so that they will reach 
from the edge of the grove to the edge of the 


i68 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


ravine, east and west, and from the ridge on 
the south to a point half way up the hill on 
the north. The defenders must guard this 
space. Within these lines will be a neutral 
strip reaching to within fifty feet of the camp 
proper. 

“The invading army will approach the camp 
from any direction they choose, singly or in 
groups. You may come from hill, ravine, 
woods or grove.” 

“How is the enemy to be repulsed?” asked 
Miles. 

“Any member of the attacking party may be 
repulsed by merely being observed, if he is be- 
yond the outer line, and if the defender is 
within the outer line. The invader must then 
retire and cannot make another attack upon 
that side of the camp. Should he reach the 
neutral strip unobserved by the defenders he 
may be captured only by being touched by a 
defender. If he reaches the inner line he has 
succeeded, and one defender must be with- 
drawn. The Wardens will act as umpires.” 

“How shall we know the exact lines?” 

“We shall, this afternoon, make the lines 
with paper, torn into small bits. This can be 
clearly seen.” 

“What will prevent one defender from re- 
maining in camp and observing every attack?” 


PLANNING THE ATTACK 169 

was Tom’s next question. ‘‘The attacking party 
would then be repulsed at once.” 

“The outer lines are too far away for com- 
plete observation from the camp, for one rea- 
son. But we should rule that a defender may 
repel by observing an enemy only when the 
defender is in the neutral strip. Again there 
are so many trees, bushes, strips of uneven 
ground and other obstacles that the attacking 
party has a very fair chance. 

“The defenders will have to send out scouts. 
These may be captured by being touched by 
the enemy. A scout discerning an attacking 
party may not run to the neutral ground and 
then repel it, but must report to the officer in 
command at the camp, who will then send word 
to a picket to be on guard or will send extra 
pickets. Those on the camp lines will be 
known as guards, on the outer camp boundaries 
pickets, and defenders beyond the boundaries 
will be scouts.” 

“May a picket be captured by the enemy?” 

“Yes, if two of the enemy reach the neutral 
ground without being observed they may cap- 
ture a picket if both touch him, and succeed 
in getting beyond the lines without capture. 
The picket must then be withdrawn. But the 
captors must not attack again on that side of 
the camp.” 


170 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


“How near must an enemy be to be repulsed 
by being observed?” 

“He must be near enough to hear a picket’s 
shout. Merely to see the enemy in the far dis- 
tance is not a repulse.” 

So the discussion went on until every detail 
was settled. Mr. Sumner had given much 
thought to the matter. 

After lunch he explained the whole plan to 
the boys. During the whole afternoon they 
discussed the rules, and every difficulty was re- 
ferred to Mr. Sumner. The boys tore up 
every available scrap of paper and made the 
lines. Supper was at five, and again after sup- 
per, the rules and difficulties were gone over in 
the light of the afternoon’s questions. 

It was nearly six o’clock when Captain Kins- 
man’s squad marched out of camp amidst 
cheers. No guns were carried, for this was to 
be a battle of wits. Each boy had his blanket 
rolled up and wrapped in oil cloth, circling 
his shoulders. His knapsack was bursting with 
the rations Blewie had provided. Two carried 
a camp kettle on a stick. The kettle was filled 
with coffee, sugar and cans of soup. 

They went down the lane and out into the 
■road. The defenders at the camp knew noth- 
ing more of their movements for every boy 


PLANNING THE ATTACK 171 

had promised to act honorably and to observe 
every rule of the game. 



The attackers were permitted to have one 
spy, that is, one boy who might, if he could, 
take observations of the camp at any time, even 
before ten o’clock of the following day. His 
capture would forfeit two men of the attacking 
party. 


172 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Once upon the highway, Warren and Hard- 
ing hastily decided that they would go to the 
river and camp for the night on a bit of high 
ground. It was about a mile distant, a ro- 
mantic spot, known as an old Indian fortifica- 
tion. There were still marks of a series of pits 
which were said to have been rifle pits for 
sharp shooters. 

There were but few necessary preparations 
for camping. The evening was clear and warm 
and there was no sign of rain. A camp fire 
was built and the kettle filled with water and 
swung over the fire on an improvised crane. 
The boys were then permitted to go swimming 
in the river while the officers held a conference. 
There were with the “attackers,” Warren, 
Harding, Inwood, Russell and McGuire. In- 
wood had been selected as the “spy.” He ex- 
pected to return to the vicinity of the camp 
when necessary. 

“We shall have a hard task to get our men 
back into that camp,” said Harding. 

“There is but one way to do it,” remarked 
Joe, “and that is by strategy.” 

“Well, you’re the great strategist, Joe. If 
you had your glider here we could all get 
on board and roll into camp before they could 
call out,” said McGuire. 

“It’s a pity we’re not all red headed like you, 


PLANNING THE ATTACK 


m 

Pat,” said Joe, scornfully. ‘‘If we were we could 
climb the trees and fall into the camp and they 
would think we were shooting stars.” 

“I agree with Joe,” said Tom thoughtfully, 
“we must use strategy. They will have pickets 
on every outer line and guards about the camp. 
Three pickets could easily protect each line. 
That means twelve boys. They will have twelve 
more to guard the camp.” 

“Would you suggest, Tom,” asked Inwood, 
“that we make an attack all together or upon 
all four sides in small groups?” 

“What do you think, Joe?” was Tom’s non- 
commital response. 

“I believe,” said Joe, seriously, “that we 
ought to make a feint from one direction and 
attack from another. What is the nearest shel- 
tered point to the neutral ground?” 

“The wood at the lower end, at the creek, is 
the nearest point,” replied the accurate Jimmie. 

“That’s the place then,” said Tom, giving a 
curious glance at Joe, “and where shall we make 
the feint?” 

“What’s a feint?” asked Pat. 

Everybody laughed. “A feint,” said Jimmie, 
“is a pretense of doing one thing, when you 
are really doing another. We ought to make a 
feint at the opposite side of the camp.” 

“I have it,” exclaimed Joe suddenly. “Tom, 


174 the young crusaders 

give me two men and I shall give that camp 
such an imitation of a great army, over to the 
right of the ravine that they will be sure that 
that is our point of attack.” 

‘‘How will you do it, Joe?” 

“Leave that to me. Inwood, are you game 
for an adventure?” 

“I think so,” was Inwood’s response. “I 
won’t slide off any roof.” 

Joe ignored this in his reply. 

“I noticed that when the names of the officers 
were called off to accompany the attackers that 
you were simply mentioned as Quartermaster. 
How many of the boys in the camp realize that 
you are not there? You spend so much time in 
the kitchen with the supplies that you are not 
connected with any platoon.” 

“Perhaps they don’t miss me at all,” was In- 
wood’s comment. 

“Now I’ll tell you what to do. You slip back 
to camp just at dark, sneaking into the kitchen. 
Begin counting your stores and supplies as usu- 
al. As the boys drift into the kitchen they will 
see you at your familiar work and they will 
think nothing of it. You are our spy and the 
rules admit of this. In the morning you may 
send us a message by wig-wagging.” 

“How can I send a message with a whole 
camp watching me?” was Inwood’s question. 


PLANNING THE ATTACK 175 

“Very easily. At exactly ten take your place 
near the bonfire. Walk west about ten paces 
and back for signal i. Walk east ten paces 
for signal 2. Walk toward the bonfire for 
signal 3. Have your account book with 
you; pretend to be studying it. Some of us will 
be watching you from somewhere. You need 
only send a word or two. What we want to know 
is from what direction they expect the attack, 
and how many guards and pickets will be on the 
side toward the woods. Send it like this : ‘East 
six,’ or ‘West eight.’ ” 

“What then?” 

“Keep your eye on the hill toward the west. 
Do you remember that you can see the sky line 
above a bare space between a clump of trees 
and some bushes? We shall light a small fire 
near that point. Direct attention to the smoke. 
They will think we are sillies enough to forget 
about the smoke. That done, your duty is ended. 
The spy in camp must do nothing else.” 

“What if I am placed on duty on a picket 
line?” 

“Beg off until after dinner, saying we must 
have meals even though we have an enemy on 
our heels.” 

Inwood quickly went over his duties, and left 
the spot where the “invaders” were bivouaced. 

Joe rapidly unfolded his plan to the other 


176 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

officers. It was. a very ingenious one, and they 
received it with great enthusiasm. They did 
not divulge the plans to the boys that night as 
they feared too much discussion would interfere 
with sleep. 

The swimmers were now back, and Ross 
was preparing the soup in the big kettle. When 
all was ready each boy filled his cup and open- 
ing his knapsack sat on the ground prepared to 
enjoy a second supper. 

^Tt’s a good place to bivouac,” remarked Joe. 

“What in the world is that?” asked Pat. 
“Who wants to bivwack or meditate, or play 
^thumbs up,’ when we are on the eve of an en- 
gagement in which we may be torn limb from 
limb by our own scared soldiers who are trying 
to hold us back. What I want to do is to sleep 
and not to go bivwacking around. What is this 
here bivwack anyway, Joe?” 

“You’re a green Irishman, Pat. I almost 
stepped on you awhile ago, not being able to 
distinguish you from the green grass. To biv- 
ouac is to encamp in the open air preparatory 
to an engagement. That’s exactly what you want 
to do.” 

“Well, I never,” said the perplexed Pat; “why 
can’t people call things by simple names? I 
heard that Red Cross gang talking about ‘anti- 
septics’ the other day, and I asked to see one, as 


PLANNING THE ATTACK 177 

I had seen nearly every other kind of bug and 
germ a’crawling over my pillow, since I’ve been 
in this camp. They brought one out, that they 
had put in a bottle with some liquid. You 
couldn’t see the antiseptic at all, for he had been 
dissolved in the liquid. They said he was a ‘Di- 
oxygen’ and there sure enough the name was on 
the bottle. I expect I’ll be covered with mos- 
quitoes, crickets, June bugs and dioxygens when 
I wake up after slaping on the ground. It’s a 
cruel world. Say, why not call this ‘Camp 
Mosquito’?” 

Pat’s good humor kept the boys in excellent 
spirits until they felt the need of sleep. They 
opened their pieces of oil cloth and spread them 
on the ground and placed their knapsacks for 
pillows. Wrapping themselves in their blankets 
they were soon asleep. All but Tom and Joe. 
They sat whispering together. 

“Make for the ‘Sentinel’, Tom,” said Joe. 
“Climb up to the top and you can see me. It 
will be easy as pie.” 

“I wish you could find the key to that cipher 
as easily as you can find ways to get into camp.” 

“You wait Tom; this camp isn’t over yet, and 
we shall know the secret of the ‘Sentinel’ before 
we leave. I have been thinking a good deal 
about it lately.” 


178 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

‘Well, turn in, Joe. You have work to do in 
the morning.” 

The camp was very quiet. The silent stars 
looked down on a remote hillock where two 
dozen boys, away from parents and teachers, 
were peacefully sleeping. They were the boys 
of rich and poor, learned and unlearned, upon 
the equal footing of boyhood. Not one of them 
had slept out of doors before, but the spell of 
discipline was on them and in their confidence 
and youthful faith they feared no evil. 

When very much later the moon arose and 
shed a glorious light upon the spot it looked upon 
a calmly sleeping group ; all but one, for in the 
pale moonlight one boy was pacing up and 
down with a look of intensity and exultation on 
his face. It was Joe Russell. 

On that night, at that hour there had come to 
Joe, in a second of time, a thought, that had 
awakened his mind to a clue, a very slight clue 
indeed, but yet a clue, to the solving of the Mys- 
tery. 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 


179 


CHAPTER XV. 

THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP. 

Early morning found 
both camps awake and 
alert. At Camp Cru- 
sader the boys were soon 
at breakfast. Among 
them was Inwood. He 
had done as directed. 
With infinite pains he 
had succeeded in getting 
to the kitchen about half 
past seven. There was 
not a suspicion among 
the boys that he was one of the enemy. His 
heart beat very fast when the first group came 
to the kitchen for a drink. Leo was counting 
over boxes and cans. It was his regular duty. 
Fred Ewing called out to him: 

“You are too busy for one man, Leo, you 
ought to get yourself incorporated into a com- 
pany.” 

Inwood replied boldly, “Why don’t you lend 
a hand, Fred, if you see so much work?” 

He joined the group and strolled into camp. 
But his second ordeal was to come. Who 



i8o THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


should meet them as they were crossing the 
creek, but Mr. Sumner. As he saw Inwood a 
queer light came into Mr. Sumner’s eyes, and he 
gave a little start, and almost began to speak. In 
a moment he called out, “Hello, boys!” and 
passed on. Leo knew that he was discovered by 
Mr. Sumner, but Mr. Sumner was a neutral, 
and would not give him away. He was not 
easy, however, until he was in his cot. 

At Camp Mosquito, for so it was called upon 
Pat’s suggestion, breakfast was served early. 
Coffee was made in the kettle and the knap- 
sacks further emptied. Joe took Ingham and 
Norris and prepared to go before the rest 
started. They had a long tramp before them. 
But Joe had time to say to Tom : 

“Tom, I have great news for you. I am al- 
most certain that I have a clue to that cipher.” 

“What is it, Joe; where did you get it?” 

“I cannot tell you now. It came to me last 
night as I was thinking over our work for today. 
But we’ll get together tonight, and if we do not 
learn something then I’ll resign.” 

Tom had to be content with that. 

Joe left with his two boys about half past 
seven. It was nearly nine when Tom started 
his company. They carefully made their way 
down the hill on which they camped and across 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP i8i 


the pasture and to the edge of the great woods. 

There was intense excitement as they entered 
the woods. After they were quite a way from the 
pasture, where they possibly might have been 
seen, Tom stopped his company and said: 

“This wood reaches right to the camp, about 
a mile away. We must go quietly because they 
may have a scout in here. Do you all under- 
stand every rule?” 

Everyone nodded. Tom continued, “Observe 
every rule strictly, obey orders exactly.” 

“Captain,” said Pat McGuire, impressively. 
“We trust you and we will follow. We would 
rather be the captors of that camp than to have 
fallen on the field of Gettysburg.” 

In single file they went on, Tom leading. He 
was not sure he could find the “Sentinel” from 
this direction but he dared not hesitate. As 
carefully if not as noiselessly as Indians, the 
line made its way over the floor of the forest. 
Tom’s judgment and luck combined, triumphed. 
He soon spied the huge tree with the little clear- 
ing about it. His thoughts reverted for a mo- 
ment to Uncle Ezra’s parchment, but were soon 
again at their task of invading the camp. 

As they quietly drew beneath the shade of the 
“Sentinel,” Tom made each boy take off his 
blanket, knapsack and hat. He then told each 
one to break off a branch with a thick bunch 


1 82 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


of leaves on it and fasten it on his shirt so that 
his face was completely shielded. 

It was a strange looking group that awaited 
further orders. 

The form of a boy surmounted by a bunch of 
leaves which hid the face was a startling figure 
to behold. 

It was now 9:30 and the squad sat down, 
awaiting orders. Jimmie Harding went a hun- 
dred yards toward camp to look out for scouts. 
Tom went off and found the little tree he and 
Joe had used a few days before and made ready 
to climb the “Sentinel.” Pulling out his watch 
he saw it was 9:40. Giving directions for 
every one to remain perfectly still, he climbed 
the little tree and was soon lost to sight in the 
branches of the “Sentinel.” 

In the meantime Inwood in the camp had 
evaded guard duty and was in the kitchen. He 
observed that Miles was doing his duty faith- 
fully. Three pickets were on each of the four 
sides at the outer boundaries. Two guards were 
on each side of the camp. Miles and Potter 
were in earnest consultation for a long time. 

Very soon, Miles took one guard and placed 
him on the picket line toward the south. He 
evidently thought that an attack would come 
from that direction. On the east toward the 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 183 

woods, the three pickets kept a keen lookout. In- 
wood noted that they were reliable boys, Ew- 
ing being one of them. 

At ten o’clock Inwood walked casually, book 
in hand, toward the camp fire. He stopped a 
moment, glancing at the tree top. No one was 
to be seen. 

Just as he was about to walk according to 
agreement Mr. Sumner came up to him. 

“Well, Leo,” he asked, but so no one could 
hear, “are you not on guard?” 

Leo looked at him hard for a moment, and 
though his heart was beating fast he said calmly: 

“No, sir. I am casting up the accounts.” 

Mr. Sumner came a little closer, winked one 
eye and said, “Don’t worry about me, Leo. You 
are all right.” 

Encouraged at this, Inwood paced off his 
message, “South — three.” 

A few moments later he looked west and sure 
enough on the hill top was a little column of 
smoke. 

Walking to a position where he would be ob- 
served by Miles, he looked earnestly at the 
smoke. 

“What do you see, Leo?” asked Miles. 
‘‘Smoke, by Jove. Potter, come here. See that 
smoke. There they are sure enough. Why in 
the world did they not think about the danger of 


1 84 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

lighting a fire? We have them. You watch 
that for a few minutes.’’ 

We must now follow Joe with Ingham and 
Norris. They made a long detour and finally 
gained the hilltop west of the camp. They hid 
behind the bushes to the side of the open space 
and earnestly watched the camp. They saw 
some of the pickets and guards. Very soon they 
spied Inwood with his book, at the fire. 

They now knew he was safely in camp and 
they rejoiced. Joe’s heart failed for a moment 
when Mr. Sumner came up but a moment later 
he took courage, as Leo paced off the wig-wag 
signal, “South — three.” 

Joe crawled back from the bushes about one 
hundred feet on the plateau at the top of the 
hill. He took a stick he had laid there, and ty- 
ing his handkerchief on it he stood upright, fac- 
ing the woods and “Sentinel.” He was too far 
beyond the crest of the hill to be seen from 
the camp. 

Quickly he raised the flag and in a moment 
he was sending toward that tree the signal 
“South — three. Attack in fifteen minutes.” 

He then lighted a little fire and waited until 
he was sure the smoke was seen. 

Joe then said to his two subalterns, “I am go- 
ing to crawl along the crest of that hill, from 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 185 

the bushes to the trees, just as if I were making 
my way down the hill to the ravine. I can be 
seen from the camp. When I reach the trees, 
I shall turn away from the crest and creeping 
along twenty feet in the rear, shall return in a 
circle to the bushes, where I started. My return 
cannot be seen. Norris, when I reach the tree 
you start, and, Ingham, you start when Norris 
reaches the tree. Follow me and do this seven 
times.” 

They then began to make their trips. 

^ 

In the camp Art Miles was elated. The smoke 
was a sure indication of the enemy. Potter soon 
called to him: 

‘^Art, quick, there is one of them.” Sure 
enough they saw a form just against the sky 
line crawling toward the trees and the ravine. 
They could not at that distance recognize the 
resourceful Joe. 

“There’s another. Happy! Count them; that’s 
two, there goes the third. Four,” he added ex- 
citedly as Joe made his second trip, “five, six, 
seven,” he counted almost breathlessly, “twenty- 
one! They are all there.” 

He stopped a moment to think. “Quick, Pot- 
ter, withdraw two pickets from the side near 
the woods, and one from the hill and put them 
toward the ravine. They are coming there.” 


1 86 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Art then hastened to each picket and guard 
saying : 

“They are all on the hill yonder; guard every 
inch of the line toward the ravine.’’ 

The Wardens were by this time in position to 
take observation of the struggle and to act as 
umpires. But even they had been misled by 
Miles’ judgment and they were at the upper 
end of the camp. 

Leo quietly went to Mr. Sumner and said so 
no one could hear: 

“Will you take a suggestion, sir? The umpires 
seem to be bunched.” 

“But they are where they can best see the at- 
tack.” 

“Art Miles is not infallible, sir,” was In- 
wood’s only reply, as he walked away. 

“Thank you, Leo,” said Mr. Sumner, kindly. 
“I see what you mean and it’s fair.” A moment 
later Mr. Sumner strolled somewhat nearer the 
other end of the camp. 

Tom Warren in the tree top found difficulty 
at first in getting sight of the hill on which he 
knew Joe to be, but at last he reached the higher 
branches and could see plainly. He soon dis- 
cerned the waving flag, “South — three, attack 
in fifteen minutes.” Tom hastily climbed 
down and told his company of the message. The 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 187 

boys were at fever heat of subdued excitement. 

There was no time to be lost. Tom ordered 
Campbell and Ross to make through the woods 
toward the grove, on the left flank, and capture a 
picket if possible, but by all means attract all 
three to that point. 

Harding rushed up saying, “We shall lose 
time finding our way, Tom.” 

But Tom smiled as he pointed to a tree 
trunk, circled with branches, tied on a few days 
before by himself. 

“We have a blazed trail, Jimmie.” 

Jimmie gave one look and without asking for 
an explanation said, “We are ready.” 

Quickly but noiselessly Tom led his company 
up the trail. As they drew nearer to the camp 
they went slowly. Tom crept on ahead to see 
if he could discover a picket. Sure enough 
right at the edge of the woods was a moving 
figure. Tom commanded his men to fall down 
on their hands and knees. There was a growth 
of small bushes here, not over a foot high. The 
bunches of leaves worn by the boys blended in 
with the bushes so completely that the advanc- 
ing boys could not be distinguished. 

The picket was evidently interested in some- 
thing at the other end of the beat. He hastened 
to that end. Tom ventured far forward, 
his face protected by his bunch of leaves. 


i88 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Suddenly his heart gave a great bound, for 
he saw Campbell quickly rise from the very 
heart of a bush and clap his hand over the mouth 
of the picket and drop him down. Ross was at 
hand to help. According to the rules the picket 
was captured. 

But what about the others? The message said, 
“Three.” He must not run too great a risk for 
one picket could send back his whole company. 

As he saw no one he signalled his men to ad- 
vance. Slowly they crept forward like small 
bushes, halting and waiting. They were now 
very near the edge of the woods. The line of 
paper was but fifty feet away. Discovery meant 
defeat until the line was crossed. 

But Tom relied on the concealment of his 
men by their green masks. Foot by foot they 
drew nearer. The line was now only about 
twenty feet away; almost near enough to make 
a dash. Where was that picket? 

Of course the camp could now be clearly 
seen. Tom realized that Joe’s scheme had 
worked, for the officers were at the further end. 

Suddenly some excitement arose. Joe had 
not failed him. There was a clamor of ex- 
cited challenges, for Joe and his two men had 
noisily attempted to reach camp from the 
ravine. This was by design. 

When the challenge arose every guard and 


THE ATTACK ON THE CAMP 189 

picket and officer turned toward the ravine. 

Tom’s chance had come. He crouched low 
and hurled back the command, “Follow me.” 
He ran at full speed toward the camp. His men 
followed. In a moment they were on the neutral 
ground free from repulse by observation. It 
was yet some distance to the camp, however. 
Every step gained before discovery meant more 
certain victory. 

The excitement was too much for Pat Mc- 
Guire. 

Raising himself up and tearing away his 
mask, he raced toward the camp shouting, “Sur- 
render, surrender!” 

It took but a moment for the defenders to 
grasp the whole situation. With great shouts they 
ran toward the advancing invaders. But it was 
too late. Pickets and guards were too far away. 
One or two men were tagged and made pris- 
oners, but the joy of conquest was too great. 
They refused to act as prisoners. The entire 
body of invaders dashed into the camp street 
with hurrahs that resounded from wood to ra- 
vine. The defenders hurried in, crestfallen; but 
excited. A little later, Little Joe and his squad 
of two appeared from the ravine and scampered 
to the spot. 

Confusion reigned. Finally Mr. Sumner 


190 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

quickly got hold of Joe and told him to blow 
“Assembly.” 

The instinct of obedience was uppermost. The 
boys fell in. Mr. Kinsman then consulted with 
Mr. Sumner and Mr. Jackson, and addressed 
the company: 

“The invaders have captured the camp. They 
have done it fairly; everyone has obeyed the 
rules. The defenders were alert and watchful 
but were defeated by superior strategy. I com- 
pliment you, Captain Warren, on your victory. 
I do not see yet how it was done, but we shall 
all wish to know. And as for you. Lieutenant 
Miles, you are a good soldier and you did 
everything in your power to save the camp. 
You, too, even in defeat, are to be congratu- 
lated. The camp now owes you all a dinner.” 

Amidst great chatter and explanation and dis- 
cussion they ate the hearty dinner Blewie had 
prepared. Little Joe had to tell of his strategy 
again and again. That afternoon most of the 
camp visited the hill top to see where Joe had 
made three men look like twenty-one and to 
take a look at the “Sentinel.” 

When the excitement had subsided it was Pat 
who broke forth with the reason of the victory. 

“We won because we had the trained minds 
of the football team on our side and because 
all the Irish were with the invaders.” 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 


191 


CHAPTER XVI. 

A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY AND A RESCUE. 

The talk about the at- 
tack on the camp lasted 
far into the evening. Leo 
Inwood had to tell sev- 
eral times how he got 
into the camp undetect- 
ed, and how he signalled 
to Joe. Campbell and 
Ross told how they had 
captured the poor picket. 
Campbell crept into the 
bush but Ross went fifty 
feet away. When the picket was exactly opposite 
the bush, Ross, hidden in another, gave a low 
whistle. The picket had stopped upon hearing 
it, and Campbell, waiting until his back was 
turned, pounced upon him. Mr. Sumner ad- 
mitted that he knew at once that Inwood was 
the spy, and wondered that no one had noticed 
that Inwood had marched away with the in- 
vaders. Thus every detail was gone over, and 
every incident related. 

As soon as possible, Joe sought out Tom War- 
ren and they went to the empty officers’ tent. 



192 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

“Tom,” began Joe, “I am sure that I have a 
clue that will help us read the riddle.” 

“So you said this morning, Joe, now out with 
it” 

“Well, I have been thinking over the a’s and 
b’s on the parchment It suddenly came to me 
while studying the signal code, that if I substi- 
tuted numbers for the letters we might read that 
puzzle.” 

“Joe, you a*re a wizard. That is a great idea; 
where is the parchment?” 

“Here is a copy of it I have not had time 
to try it out We can do it now.” 

The two boys were seated close together un- 
der the light of a tin lantern which held a can- 
dle. They held the paper close to the light and 
their heads almost touched as they leaned for- 
ward to examine it 

“Take that first line, Joe. It goes this way: 
abagbahbbtalbfbbnbaxaabp. 

“If we substitute i for a and 2 for b, we get 
12 1 as the first letter, that is C.” 

“What about the g?” 

“Let’s try the a’s and b’s first” 

Tom drew out a pencil and made the follow- 
ing arrangement of the letters: 

aba ba bb a b bb ba aab 

121 21 22 12 22 21 112 

C O A I T A O U. 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 193 

“Coaitaou. That doesn’t make sense, Joe.” 
Joe was silent. He thought a few minutes, 
and then said : 

“We are stupids. Try with a as 2 and b as 

I.” 


Again Tom wrote: 

aba ba bb a b bb ba aab 

212 12 II 2 I II 12 221 


S ENT I N E L. 


“Hurrah, that’s it, Tom, ‘Sentinel’.” And 
Joe gave Tom an excited slap on the back. “We 
have it; good for you, old Tom.” 

Tom’s eyes glistened and he gave a little 
hysterical laugh. 

“You’re right, old scout, we have it. Hurry, 
let’s read it all.” 

Tom was unusually aroused. He had never 
had much faith in their learning the clue. 
Quickly he made ready to write down the other 
letters. 

“Every letter in there but a and b is simply 
a mark of separation. Give me only the a’s 
and b’s.” 

It was but a few minutes until he had them 
copied. Quickly they translated them. 


ba aa aba 
12 22 212 
e a s 


bbab aa abb 
1121 22 211 
w a 


aaa a ba bb 
222 2 12 II 
d t e n 


r 


fi 94 the young crusaders 

aaab ba ba a a baa abb ba ba aaab ba ba 

2221 12 12 2 2 122 2II 12 12 2221 12 12 

feetth ree fee 

a aaa ba ba baba. 

2 222 12 12 1212 . 
t d e e p. 

E-a-s-t-w-a-r-d t-e-n f-e-e-t. 

T-h-r-e-e f-e-e-t d-e-e-p. 

‘‘Eastward ten feet, three feet deep. That 
means from the ‘Sentinel.’ Tom, that’s where 
our treasure is. Let’s go and take a look at the 
spot. Have you a compass?” 

“Ewing has one. I’ll get it.” 

“Get an oil lantern, too, Tom.” 

Tom hurried out of the tent. Joe still pored 
over the paper, his eyes glowing. 

In a few minutes Tom returned. 

“It is nearly nine o’clock. I have permission 
from Mr. Sumner to leave camp for a short 
time. Here is the lantern, but we must not 
light it now. Fred let me take his compass, too, 
but he was very curious and asked twice what I 
wanted it for.” 

Tom and Joe started for the creek. Al- 
though it was not very dark, they went slowly, 
for they were in danger of stumbling over a 
stone or log. A short distance from the camp 
they lighted the lantern and then hunted for 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 195 

the tree that marked the entrance to their trail 
in the woods. 

As Tom and Joe left camp a dark figure 
slipped behind a tree near the creek. It was 
Fred Ewing. As they proceeded he followed. 
Going from tree to bush to keep out of sight 
and moving only when they moved, so as to 
attract no attention by any noise he might 
make, Fred kept them in view. This was 
much easier when the lantern was lighted. 

Into the deep woods they went, looking for 
the marked trees. It was as dark as pitch for 
the star light made no impression on the floor of 
the forest. Slowly they moved forward. The 
light from the lantern cast weird reflections and 
dancing shadows on all sides of them. 

Fred now drew close for he could see his way 
only with difficulty and he needed the feeble 
light which the lantern shed over the trail. Joe 
and Tom did not look behind them but pressed 
on. Fred, forty feet in the rear and stepping 
softly, went from tree to tree so that he might 
seek shelter if he needed it. 

Soon they reached the small clearing. 
There stood the mighty trunk of the “Sentinel.” 
Tom and Joe hastened to it and Tom took out 
his compass. 

Fred slipped behind the nearest tree and 
waited. 


196 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Under the spell of their secret mission Tom 
and Joe still talked in low voices. 

“Here is the East,” and Tom moved slowly 
about the tree, compass in hand, while Joe 
held the lantern. “Now, this is the center of the 
tree toward the East. Joe, pace off ten feet.” 

Joe did so in silence. Tom went to examine 
the earth at the point where Joe stood. They 
knelt down and put the lantern on the ground. 

At this movement the curious Fred leaned 
far from his shelter. The rays from the lantern 
striking his face made it exceedingly white 
against the background. Tom, glancing up, 
caught a glimpse of the white face. For a mo- 
ment he was frightened into speechlessness. A 
cold chill ran up his back and his teeth set. In 
another moment he saw the uniform beneath the 
white face and he knew they had been followed. 

Quickly Tom stooped again to regain his 
composure and to give himself time to think. Joe 
noticed Tom’s disturbed demeanor. Tom said 
in a low whisper: 

“Joe, we have been followed. There’s a 
boy behind that tree.” 

Joe turned. “Are you sure, Tom?” 

“Yes, sure.” 

Joe then said very loud: 

“This is no place to put a trap for wood 
chucks, Tom.” 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 197 

Tom saw Joe’s meaning, so he replied, 
^‘You’re right, Joe, let’s go further on.” 

As they arose, Joe stepped toward the tree 
and shouted: 

“Who is there? Get out of there 1 ” 

The startled Fred, taken by surprise, turned 
and ran as best he could. Tom and Joe saw his 
retreating form disappear in the deep shadows. 

“Quick, Tom, we must get back or we shall 
have the whole camp out here if that fellow 
suspects anything. Who do you suppose it is?” 

“We shall soon find out.” 

Quickly they made their way to the creek, 
by the means of the now familiar marked trees. 
When they reached camp Tom quietly said: 

“Joe, you wait here to see if any one comes 
out of the woods and I’ll find out who is miss- 
ing.” 

Tom quickly made the rounds of the tents. 
One cot in Tent 7 was empty. Hastily going to 
Headquarters, Tom looked on the bulletin to see 
who occupied Tent 7. Fred Ewing was one, 
but Ewing was not in the tent. Tom then went 
to see who was on guard. It was Norris. Ewing 
was not accounted for. He had suspected 
that it was Ewing ever since he started back 
from the tree. Ewing had been very curious 
about the use of the compass. 

Tom joined Joe and together they waited. 


198 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

but no boy appeared. Ten o’clock came, the 
guards were changed; still Tom and Joe waited. 
But all was quiet toward the woods. Tom 
again went to Ewing’s tent. His cot was empty. 
Upon returning he showed some anxiety. 

“Joe, perhaps Fred cannot find his way out. 
He may be lost in the woods.” 

“That’s so,” said the startled Joe. “We 
scared him and he ran off so quickly he could 
not follow us out.” 

“That’s pretty serious, Joe. He may get 
badly hurt by falling over tree trunks and he 
might get awfully frightened. There are one or 
two big bluffs near the river, too. There is no 
telling in which direction he has gone.” 

“I’m going to tell Mr. Sumner.” 

Mr. Sumner was aroused. When the story 
was told to him, he acted with a rapidity which 
startled the boys. 

As he was hastily pulling on His clothes, he 
said: 

“Warren, you go and wake every boy in 
camp. Tell them to dress. Russell, you build 
up the bonfire as high as you can. We’ll be 
ready in a moment.” 

By this time Mr. Kinsman and Mr. Jackson 
were awake, too, and dressing. Mr. Sumner 
sought out Joe at the fire. 

“Joe, blow assembly.” 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 199 

Quickly the sleepy boys assembled. The news 
that Fred was lost in the woods soon aroused 
them. 

Mr. Kinsman took command. 

“Red Cross Squad, get your stretcher and 
medicine chest! Each boy who has a lantern 
drop out of line and get it. First set of fours, 
get your guns. Quartermaster, furnish twenty- 
five cartridges to each of the first set of fours. 
The guards will remain at camp and will keep 
the bonfire going. Light another below the 
camp on the edge of the woods. 

“Young Crusaders, this is serious. We must 
find that boy. We shall make a long line. Each 
boy keep in touch with the ones on right and 
left. Try to keep not over forty feet apart. Lis- 
ten for orders that may be passed along the 
line.” 

Quickly he marched the boys along the 
edge of the woods. The side of the woods near 
the camp was only about a quarter of a mile 
long, but the woods widened gradually to over a 
mile. They were more than a mile deep. 

As the column, in single file, marched paral- 
lel to the edge of the woods, Mr. Jackson 
caused one boy to drop from the column every 
forty feet. The long line reached from creek to 
the grove. Nearly every one had a lantern. 

Finally the word came along the line to 


200 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


advance. Quickly the long row entered the 
shadows. According to instructions, they called 
“Fred,” not loudly. After each call they lis- 
tened for a reply. But a solemn silence brooded 
over the forest. 

Slowly the line moved on. The darkness, re- 
lieved only by the glimmer of occasional lan- 
terns, the dark moving forms, and the echoes 
that resounded long after a call, affected the 
boys strangely. 

In about five minutes the word came to 
halt. Then came the command, “Right Dress.” 

The line had been getting ragged, as some 
moved faster than others. 

At this point, Mr. Sumner caused the guns 
to be fired. After the firing had sent a great 
roaring crash, echoing and re-echoing through 
the forest, there was intense silence, so intense 
indeed that the boys keyed to a high pitch of ex- 
citement began to show symptoms of panic. 
Again the word came : 

^^Steady boys, steady^ 

Along the line it passed from boy to boy. 
It had the desired effect. Again the long 
line moved forward. Each small log was ex- 
amined to see if it were the missing boy. Again 
the command came to halt, and the guns were 
fired. The column was now about a quarter of 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY zoi 


a mile through the woods. Soon the “Sentinel” 
was passed by the center of the line. 

As the woods grew wider the column did 
not sweep the entire distance. Jimmie Harding 
was on the extreme left. He kept turning away 
from the direction in which they were moving 
—calling, “FRED.” 

Just after the second halt, Jimmie thought 
he heard a faint cry. He stopped and shouted 
as loud as possible, “FRED.” 

But the calls of the others prevented him 
from hearing. He then, upon his own responsi- 
bility, commanded ‘^Halt!” Quickly the word 
was carried on. 

“Silence along the line.” For a moment there 
was anything but silence ; then all was quiet. 

Jimmie then said, “Send Mr. Kinsman to 
Harding on left.” 

These words were carried from boy to boy. 
Soon Mr. Kinsman, who had been near the cen- 
ter, reached Jimmie. 

“Mr. Kinsman, I believe I heard a faint an- 
swer way off there to the left. Our line does 
not reach as far as that. May we halt while I go 
there to see?” 

“Fll go with you, Jimmie.” 

They made their way a hundred feet. Jimmie 
again called, “FRED.” 

At first he could hear nothing but the echoes 


202 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


in the trees. Then suddenly so far off it was 
almost like the sighing of the wind, came the 
sound, “Halloo.” 

“He’s there,” was Jimmie’s exclamation. 

“Wait here, we must change the direction of 
this line.” 

Mr. Kinsman returned to the first boy. 

“Send the command, ‘left face, forward 
march’.” 

This command went ringing through the for- 
est. The whole line was now slowly drawing 
toward the spot where the faint halloo was 
sounded. But Mr, Kinsman halted the first boy. 
The second was soon on the spot. One by one 
they came in. There in the heart of the woods, 
the whole company gathered. 

“I feared to go to the left without re-forming 
the line. Some one else might get lost.” 

Quickly they spread out again, much nearer 
together and at right angles to their previous 
direction. 

After marching about one hundred yards, they 
again halted, and Mr. Kinsman called, ''Fred/' 

After a moment they could distinguish the an- 
swer, “Here, — here.” 

It was a little louder. They went forward at 
a quicker pace. Another halt, and the response 
was very plain, “Here, quick.” 

As fast as they could, they moved on. Sud- 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 203 

denly Mr. Sumner called, “Halt.” The line 
halted. 

“Gather to the center.” Quickly they came 
together as the line had not been so far extended 
as before. The group was now in a ragged 
formation, the lanterns lighting up white faces. 
Mr. Sumner commanded: 

“Move forward very slowly. Watch the 
ground.” 

By this time Fred’s cries were very clear. 

“Here, here.” 

Mr. Sumner called out: 

“Fred, we will find you in a moment.” 

The answer came at once, “All right.” 

Mr. Sumner was mystified. Why did not 
Fred come toward them; was he hurt? He 
called once more : 

“Fred, are you hurt?” 

“No, I am all right.” 

A sigh of relief went up. But where was he, 
why did he not move? 

The rays of the lanterns now showed that the 
trees were farther apart. A moment later they 
came into a small clearing, very dimly lighted 
by the stars overhead. 

There stood Fred. 

The foremost boys seized him with a rush. 
Loud were the shouts and cheers that echoed 


204 the young crusaders 

through the woods. Tom noticed that the War- 
dens quietly shook hands with each other. 

As soon as quiet was somewhat restored, Fred 
tried to answer the hundred questions that had 
been hurled at him. A strange group it was, 
gathered close, with lanterns casting flickering 
shadows on the forest wall by which they were 
surrounded. 

Fred told how he had followed Tom and Joe. 
When they startled him, he ran, thinking to re- 
turn to camp. But he turned in the wrong di- 
rection. In a few minutes he knew he was 
lost. He called but no answer came. It was 
very dark. He thought he might find the creek. 
He feared the fallen logs. At last he came to 
the little clearing. Here he resolved to wait. 
After being there what seemed a very long time, 
he heard the guns. He then knew that efforts 
were being made to find him. But he could not 
distinguish the direction from which the firing 
came. Fearing to venture into the woods again, 
he waited, shouting as loud as he could. At last 
he knew that help was near, so he kept his posi- 
tion. Finally the boys came. He was very 
grateful. It was an experience from which he 
would learn a lesson. 

For a while the whole group thought itself 
lost. But by spreading out again, they soon 
found the “Sentinel.” Gathering here they 


A CLUE TO THE MYSTERY 205 

„iiade their way to camp, where great blazing 
fires were burning high. The Wardens served 
bread and milk in the kitchen and the boys held 
a short jubilee around the fire. Then they went 
to bed. 

Many a boy, who had been neglectful before, 
said his prayers that night. 


2o6 the young crusaders 


CHAPTER XVIL 

A FORCED MARCH. 

Reveille sounded as 
usual on Thursday morn- 
ing. The appearance of 
the boys indicated a 
sleepless night. The ex- 
citement had been too 
much for them. 

Fred Ewing was very 
quiet. He was wonder- 
ing what punishment he 
would receive for having 
caused so much trouble. 
Would he be sent home? 

When the list of boys who had forfeited 
credits was read, Fred’s name was not called. 
But as Mr. Sumner finished he made a long 
pause. 

“There is one case of disobedience,” he finally 
said, “that has not been mentioned in this list. 
Sergeant Ewing left camp last night without 
permission. That was in itself a breach of dis- 
cipline, which ordinarily would mean losing 
five points. His only motive was curiosity. He 
had no intention of doing mischief, certainly no 




A FORCED MARCH 


207 


intention of arousing the camp. We are glad 
he met with no mishap during his adventure. 
His record is clear to date, and this is a point 
in his favor. It has seemed advisable to the 
Wardens, however, to take some precautionary 
measures. Ewing cannot leave camp bounds 
again, for any reason, unless ordered to do so, 
until further notice.” 

Fred’s face lighted up. He was not to be sent 
home. The camp bounds were large. He had 
been fairly dealt with and not rated as wilfully 
disobedient in order to make trouble. 

When the company was dismissed, Fred 
stepped up to Mr. Sumner, saying simply and 
sincerely: 

“Thank you, sir.” 

Mr. Sumner was evidently pleased, for he put 
his hands on Fred’s shoulder, saying: 

“We have no personal feeling about it, Fred. 
It’s for the good of the camp.” 

“I know it. You will find me about camp, 
from now on.” 

“We feel sure of that, Fred. No one is going 
to take the trouble to watch you.” 

“I’ll be here,” asserted Fred. 

Joe and Tom sought out the Wardens soon 
after breakfast. 

“You gave us permission to leave the camp 
last night,” said Captain Warren. “We tried 


2o8 the young crusaders 


to allow no one to see us, but I borrowed a com- 
pass from Ewing and it aroused his suspicions. 
We are sorry for the trouble we made.” 

‘^It was not your fault. Did you accomplish 
your errand?” 

“No, we were interrupted.” 

“You boys have something on your mind,” 
broke in Mr. Kinsman, laughing. “You act like 
a couple of conspirators. Can you not take us 
into your confidence? Are you planning to blow 
up the camp?” 

Tom laughed, too. 

“It would sound foolish to you, Mr. Kinsman, 
but Joe and I have been at work all winter on 
something which has deeply interested us. We 
have no desire to conceal anything from you, but 
we have nothing to tell except a few wild guesses. 
If you would permit us one full day to ourselves, 
we can determine whether we are on a wild 
goose chase or not.” 

“Please let us consider it for a few minutes. 
We will send for you.” 

When the boys had gone, the Wardens looked 
at each other. Then Mr. Jackson said: 

“They are two of the most reliable boys in the 
camp. They are good officers. Joe Russell has 
done one or two good things and Tom is level 
headed. I am in favor of giving them a day.” 

“So am I,” added Mr. Sumner. “Joe thought 


A FORCED MARCH 


209 

out that attack on the camp, and it was a work 
of art.’’ 

“I believe we shall do it, then,” was Mr. Kins- 
man’s decision. 

The boys were summoned. 

*We are going to give you a day’s leave of 
absence,” said Mr. Kinsman. “When do you 
want to go?” 

Joe answered promptly: 

“We should like to take some rations and our 
blankets and go tonight after ten. No one will 
follow us again.” 

“Very well; report to me just before you 
leave.” 

Tom and Joe thanked the Wardens and has- 
tened away to prepare for their expedition. 

Just then a wagon drove into camp. It was 
a traveling butcher’s cart which supplied the 
camp from the distant village. The driver 
alighted and as Inwood was looking over his 
supply, he remarked: 

“I passed a big automobile four miles back, 
filled with people coming to the camp. They 
were clean bruk down; something wrong with 
their engine. They told me to tell Mr. Winter 
to drive out for them.” 

Tom overheard the driver’s statement. He 
at once asked : 

“Have you been to Mr. Winter’s?” 


210 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


“No, and I don’t want to, if I can help it, as 
I am going the other road.” 

“We shall get word to him,” was Tom’s reply. 

Just then Mr. Jackson came down the camp 
street. Tom explained the situation to him. 

Mr. Jackson was interested at once. He was 
sure it was Mr. Hoyt and his party. 

“How many are in the party?” he asked of the 
driver of the meat wagon. 

“A big, fat man, his wife and a whole passel 
of girls. They are on the upper road, and there 
is no farm house near them. They looked 
pretty hungry.” 

Mr. Jackson acted at once. He asked Tom 
to accompany him, and they took two of the 
bicycles that were in camp and rode to Mr. 
Winter’s. 

Mrs. Winter informed them that Mr. Win- 
ter had taken his horses to the blacksmith shop, 
several miles away. He had ridden one and led 
the other. 

Mr. Jackson thought quickly, then asked: 

“The light wagon is here, Mrs. Winter?” 

“Yes, it’s in the barn. 

Mr. Jackson and Tom went to look at it. It 
was a very light spring wagon, quite long. 

“Tom, you go back to camp and tell Mr. 
Kinsman and Mr. Sumner of the predicament 



AT THE CALL OF ‘ASSEMBLY 










A FORGED MARCH 


2II 


of our friends. Get their permission to carry 
out my plans.” 

He then carefully instructed Tom, who rode 
hastily back to camp. When the Wardens heard 
his story, Mr. Kinsman at once said: 

^‘There will be nothing better for the boys 
than this opportunity. They are restless today, 
and the usual routine is dragging. Take charge, 
Tom.” 

Captain Warren buckled on his sword, and 
Bugler Russell blew assembly. The Captain 
stepped before the company and made this ex- 
planation: 

^‘Our friend Mr. Hoyt, with a large party is 
about four miles away. His car has broken 
down. We are to go to his rescue. We must 
make a quick march. Quartermaster, bring out 
the emergency rations.” 

Inwood disappeared into his tent, and soon 
emerged bearing a large tin box. The surprised 
and eager boys watched him with interest. To 
each one he gave a large cake of chocolate, in 
its original wrapper. They were told to put the 
chocolate in the pockets of their shirts. 

Captain Warren then began his instructions. 

“Lieutenant Harding, march your platoon to 
Mr. Winter’s farm. I shall command the other 
platoons. Corporal McGuire, mount a wheel, 
and accompany Lieutenant Harding. Sergeant 


212 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Ewing, mount the other wheel as my orderly 1 
Wait I” 

Turning to Mr. Kinsman, he said, beg your 
pardon, sir, I did not intend to issue an order 
contrary to your discipline.” 

Mr. Kinsman smiled. “I know you did not. 
The sentence upon Sergeant Ewing, however, 
was that he was not to leave camp without or- 
ders. There is no reason why the Captain’s or- 
der should not stand, is there, Mr. Sumner?” 

“None whatever. The Captain is in com- 
mand.” 

Tom hesitated. “If you will understand that 
I have no desire to go contrary to your wishes, 
I will repeat the order. Sergeant Ewing, mount 
the wheel.” 

It was too much for Pat McGuire. Breaking 
all rules, he raised his hat and shouted, “Three 
cheers for our Wardens!” 

They were given with a hearty good will. 
Ewing, red with embarrassment, stood with 
wheel ready. The command was given to 
march. 

As the two Wardens turned away to their 
tents to await the return of the company, and to 
arrange for the dinner of their guests, Mr. Sum- 
ner turned to Mr. Kinsman and laughingly re- 
marked : 

“John, that was a stroke of genius. That will 


A FORCED MARCH 


213 

do more good for the spirit of loyalty in this 
camp than a score of punishments.” 

The first platoon, on reaching Mr. Winter’s, 
found a light spring wagon in the yard, with 
two baskets of apples on it and a can of milk. 
Pat was seated on the wagon, having ridden 
ahead on the wheel to report progress. A long 
rope, knotted every few feet, was attached to 
the axle. 

‘‘We are going to the rescue of our friends,’* 
remarked Mr. Jackson, simply. “Campbell, 
you and Ross take the wagon pole and the others 
the rope.” 

“Yes,” said Pat, “we are about to deliver ap- 
ples and milk to the perishing. We are the 
Rural Free Delivery of Agricultural Products.” 

“Get off that wagon, Pat,” shouted Harding. 
“We offer no chromos with our goods. Get off.” 

Pat climbed off, and mounted the wheel. At 
double time the wagon was whirled into the 
road. Ross and Campbell had difficulty in 
steering at first, but soon caught the knack. The 
boys struck a steady trot for a distance and then 
resumed a brisk walk. Quickly they sped along. 
* * 

Captain Warren had marched his two pla- 
toons toward the stranded car. When about a 
mile 2Lnd a half from Mr. Winter’s,- he com- 
manded the second platoon to halt at the road 


214 the young crusaders 

side. He went on at a steady march, route step, 
with the third. He had sent Ewing forward on 
his wheel to tell Mr. Hoyt help was coming. 

Scarcely had the third platoon fairly started 
from the place where the second rested, than a 
speck appeared on the road in the distance. It 
was soon seen to be Fred, pumping away on his 
wheel, and speeding with a message. He dashed 
up, dismounted and, saluting, reported: 

^‘Mr. Hoyt and his party are waiting about 
two miles and a half from here. I have in- 
formed them that help is at hand.” 

^ ^ * 

In the meantime the wagon was bumping over 
the road. The boys began, after a while, to 
show signs of fatigue and the pace was slower. 
Suddenly they spied a group waiting in the 
shade of a tree, one hundred yards ahead. With 
a shout they made a dash and the wagon was 
hauled at a great speed to the tree and halted. 

The second platoon took up the rope. In that 
moment of change Mr. Jackson emptied a heap 
of apples on the grass and ordered the first pla- 
toon to rest there and await the return of the 
party. Jimmy Harding announced that the time 
of the first relay was twenty-two minutes. 

The second stage of the journey was made 
very quickly by the enthusiastic boys. Mr. 
Jackson went on with this relay. In exactly 


A FORCED MARCH 


215 


eighteen minutes they came to where Captain 
Warren awaited them with the third platoon. 
This platoon was reinforced by the general offi- 
cers. 

Here Mr. Jackson took Ewing’s wheel and 
rode ahead to the waiting automobile. He came 
upon an impatient but happy party. As he 
grasped Mr. Hoyt’s hand, he said: 

‘‘This is not the way to Cleveland.” 

Everyone laughed. He greeted Mrs. Hoyt 
and the daughters, and then met the others. 
There were four girls, nieces of Mr. Hoyt, not 
yet out of school. They were Louise and Elsie 
Seymour, and Edith and Margaret Stevens. 

“You will soon be rescued, Mr. Hoyt. Relief 
is on the way.” 

“You are our Knight-errant, Mr. Jackson,” 
said Miss Marion Hoyt. Mr. Jackson looked 
pleased. 

“The girls wanted to walk to camp, but I 
thought it too far,” remarked Mrs. Hoyt. “Did 
you have any difficulty in getting horses?” 

“We have a horseless wagon for you, Mrs. 
Hoyt,” responded Mr. Jackson, with a smile. 

“In that case, it should be here soon,” said 
Mr. Hoyt. “I didn’t know that any motors 
were available in this part of the country.” 

“Necessity is the mother of invention, Mr. 
Hoyt.” 


2i6 the young crusaders 


A cloud of dust down the road attracted their 
attention. Soon the wagon came into view, vig- 
orously pulled by the rapidly moving boys. 

“Oho! that’s your horseless carriage. You 
shall pay for that, young man,” shouted Mr. 
Hoyt, gleefully. 

The meeting of the two parties was a joyous 
occasion. Introductions were made, and the offi- 
cers at once began to look after the comfort of 
the party. 

Apples were passed about and glasses of 
milk, which were gratefully received. 

There was much discussion as to who should 
ride. Mr. Jackson insisted that Mr. and Mrs. 
Hoyt take the seat of the wagon. It was finally 
agreed that the young people should ride and 
walk by turns. 

Mr. Hoyt looked worried. Finally he said 
to Mr. Jackson: “I do not like to leave this 
machine here in this deserted place. I think I’ll 
stay here, until I can get help.” 

“If you will let me arrange matters, we can 
take care of things all right. I will leave Mc- 
Guire and Ewing here, with their wheels. They 
will take charge. We can reach Portage on the 
telephone from Mr. Winter’s and ask for help. 
Mr. Winter can haul in the machine.” So it 
was arranged. 

Before making the start back to camp, Mr. 


A FORCED MARCH 


217 

Hoyt transferred two large boxes from the ton- 
neau of his machine to the wagon. 

Slowly the strange party proceeded along 
the road, a spring wagon filled with the guests, 
pulled by a long line of youthful soldiers. They 
came at length to the second platoon, who took 
hold of the rope also. Progress was more rapid 
now because of the additional help. When they 
reached the refreshed first platoon, the third 
platoon was ordered to halt and rest. It had 
traversed the whole distance. 

The first and second platoons soon whirled the 
light wagon into camp. Dinner was ready. 
Scarcely five minutes behind them came the 
third platoon. They had been too impatient to 
rest long. 

After dinner, Mr. Hoyt went to Mr. Winter’s 
and made arrangements for the whole party to 
spend the night. He, himself, had been invited 
to spend the night at camp. 

The young people began to enjoy themselves. 
Mr. Jackson escorted Miss Marion Hoyt about 
the camp, while Mr. Sumner did the same for 
Miss Catherine. Tom, Joe, Leo Inwood and 
Dick Brewer made the day pleasant for the 
younger girls. Louise Seymour and Tom, with 
Joe and Elsie Seymour, climbed the hill, and 
the girls listened to a modest account of the 
sham battle. Edith Stevens found Leo’s account 


2i8 the young crusaders 


of his duties as a spy equally interesting, while 
Margaret Stevens made Dick give the history 
of the fire. 

Late in the afternoon all gathered again. 
Soon Pat and Ewing came riding in. The auto- 
mobile was in the safe hands of a mechanician 
from a Portage garage. 

“That auburn haired boy looks interesting,” 
remarked Elsie Seymour. 

Joe at once called Pat to join the group. The 
older members gathered near. Pat was polite 
and answered several questions about the camp. 

“Who was the boy on the wheel with you?” 
asked Edith Stevens. 

“He is the great missing link,” was Pat’s re- 
ply, “Fred Ewing.” 

“Tell them about it, Pat,” said Tom. 

So Pat began. At first it was a simple story 
of facts, but as Pat warmed to his work, a twinkle 
came to his eye, and fancy began to weave itself 
to fact. The interested group drew nearer. 
Mrs. Marshall and Anna and the Wardens were 
now listening to Pat’s recital. Pat’s imagination 
was fired. Casting aside all reserve and veracity, 
he launched into the realm of fantasy: 

“We were now in the heart of the forest. We 
could hear the wild beasts scamperin’ away 
ahead of us. The Wardens, deadly pale, were 
meditating a retreat (here Pat cast a sly glance 


A FORCED MARCH 


219 


in their direction), when some red headed Celt 
called, ‘Forward!’ We plunged as one man 
through bushes and over logs. There was 
no reshtrainin’ us. At last, when we had fired 
our last shot, and had worn out our voices callin’, 
we burst into a clearing, lighted by the clear 
light of the silvery moon. There, pacing up 
and down, his arms folded on his breast like 
Napoleon at Waterloo, vainly endeavoring to 
feel his way and clutching wildly at the bushes, 
while with one hand he reached for the knife in 
his boot leg, shtood the immovable Fred, gazing 
darkly at the stars.” 

Pat beat a hasty retreat amidst gales of 
laughter. Elsie gave one look after him. 

“Won’t he come back?” she asked, quietly. 


220 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 

After supper the bon- 
fire was piled high with 
great pieces of wood, 
and a jolly party gath- 
ered at Headquarters. 
Even Mrs. Marshall and 
Mrs. Hoyt had consented 
to pay the camp an even- 
ing visit. Mr. Hoyt 
opened his boxes which 
were found to contain 
candies. They were dis- 
tributed among the boys. 

Mr. Jackson found a comfortable camp stool 
for Marion Hoyt, and sat on the ground beside 
her. Pat strolled toward the group, his red 
hair carefully brushed, and his face shiny with 
soap and water. Many of the boys went to bed 
early, tired out from the strenuous experiences 
of the last twenty-four hours. But the officers 
were all on hand. Each young lady had an es- 
cort on the right and left. Pat found a com- 
fortable place near Elsie. 

Mr. Hoyt had been the life of the party. He 




ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


221 


made himself exceedingly popular with the boys 
by his cordial manner. At supper he had fallen 
in behind the company, with a plate and other 
necessaries borrowed from Mr. Jackson, and 
had received his rations at the serving table. 

The group indulged in general conversation 
and laughing comments for a short time. Mr. 
Hoyt soon began to tell a story to Anna Mar- 
shall. But the others caught the opening words 
and all stopped to listen. Those of the boys 
who had not gone to sleep had gathered about 
the outer edge of the circle. 

“I didn’t go to one of these new fangled col- 
leges, where they make a man turn up his trou- 
sers and go bare headed in order to matriculate,” 
began Mr. Hoyt. ^‘My college was one of the 
original kind that Noah took into the ark with 
him. We ate when we got through studying, 
instead of studying when we got through eating 
and drinking. The fellows then knew more 
about who scored a touch down at Thermopylae 
and less about the Harvard-Yale games. Our 
tutors made us shake hands across the sea with 
Latin grammar, until we knew all the exceptions 
well enough to call them by their first names. 
Nor could we stay out at night, sky-larking 
around with a banjo and a few mandolins, and 
singing sentimental songs to the college widows. 
Our President would have had us expelled for 


222 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


scandalous conduct if we had done that. No, 
we were the plain and unornamented students. 
The older of us grew wavy side whiskers, to 
make us resemble the celebrated divines whose 
portraits adorned the walls of our assembly 
room. Our clothes were the kind mother used 
to make. 

*We all lived in a great dormitory, with a 
tutor in every division to keep order, and to help 
us with our sums. Some of the tutors were de- 
cent fellows, but for the most part they were 
men who looked upon college boys as an evil to 
be tolerated. For our clothes and whiskers had 
not subdued in us the taint of original sin, and 
we had the same high spirits that prompt bo3^s 
to do all sorts of mischief. But we were most 
of us what I might call artificial sinners. We 
didn’t indulge in any real wickedness, but we 
sometimes managed to make good Latin of our- 
selves by being exceptions to the faculty rules. 
We were irregular verbs, as it were. 

“Now these tutors didn’t realize that the boys 
were of more consequence than the rules, so 
sometimes when a tutor came along humming to 
himself, the opening of Virgil’s epic: 

^''Arma virumque cemo, Troiae qui primus 
ab oris/ 

“Or when he was indulging in a slight intel- 
lectual recreation by rehearsing the corrolaries 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


223 


of geometry in the hallway, and he spied a boy 
about to awaken fresh enthusiasm in a classmate 
by emptying a bucket of water on his head from 
an upper window, the poor tutor reached in his 
pocket, drew out a six shooter rule and let the 
offender have all six shots. It was too bad. 

“Such attentions got on our nerves somewhat, 
and our tutors did not come in for that share of 
love and esteem that the college chaplain urged 
us to show toward our governors and teachers. 

“One of the stringent rules of our dyspeptic 
guardians was that nothing to eat should be 
brought into our rooms in the dormitory. Our 
faculty thought that eating in the dormitory 
would not only be a cause of disaster to our 
youthful constitutions, but would hinder the 
orderly progress of our minds toward the heights 
of knowledge. So stringent were they about this, 
that you might have thought that eating in the 
dormitories had been the cause of every revolu- 
tion and catastrophe from the plagues of Phar- 
aoh to the panic of ’73, and that abstinence from 
eating between meals had been the cause of 
every good, from Magna Charta to the Declara- 
tion of Independence.” 

Here Mr. Hoyt paused. 

“I’ll tell you the rest tomorrow night,” he 
added after a moment. 

Cries of protest arose, so he resumed. 


224 the young crusaders 

^‘Well, one particular day, several of us took 
a walk into the country. It was a cold clear day 
and a light fall of snow had mantled the earth 
with a robe as pure as ermine. The branches 
of the leafless trees were 

‘‘ ‘Boughs that shake against the cold, — 
Bare, ruined choirs where late the sweet 
birds sang.’ 

“Upon the distant hill tops, purple against a 
leaden sky were dimly seen — ” 

“Richard,” interrupted Mrs. Hoyt, laying a 
hand affectionately on his arm and smiling, 
“please go on with the story, and stop rehears- 
ing that old essay of ‘Winter.’ ” 

“You see,” said Mr. Hoyt, “that’s as far as I 
can carry the description as I have a standing 
agreement with Mrs. Hoyt that she is to inter- 
rupt me at that point. Hanged if I know what 
was on the distant hill tops. Well, to resume, 
a solitary turkey liked our looks, in spite of 
home spun clothes, and insisted on accompany- 
ing us. ‘Poor bird, so far away from home,’ 
said we, ‘why can we not offer him shelter?’ We 
acted upon the thought, and with care provided 
a place in the college basement. There were 
enough farmers in our crowd to know what to 
do to make a turkey serve his fellow men, and 
they did it. That same evening, when the shades 
of night had fallen, we slipped our turkey into 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


225 


a pan, and placed him on the stove in my room. 
Seven or eight boys assembled for the ceremony. 
All was quiet in the dormitory. Below us a 
group of boys were studying for examination. 
They had not been invited to the feast. 

“Just as our turkey had turned to a glowing 
brown, we heard a slow footstep in the corridor. 
The restless tutor, like a war horse scenting the 
battle from afar, had forgotten his prejudices so 
far as to allow the delicate odor of roasting tur- 
key to enter his nostrils. He had been alone on 
the floor above. He came and knocked on our 
door. 

“Hastily I seized our turkey and thrusting 
him into a pillow slip, I tied the mouth of the 
slip with a bit of rope and hung him out of the 
window; thrust the pan into my trunk, locked it, 
and admitted the tutor. 

“His eyes glowed when he stepped into the 
room. The air was heavy with the fragrance 
of the roast turkey. 

“ ‘Gentlemen,’ he began, in a thin, squeaky 
voice, ‘you are disobeying the rules of the 
faculty by having eatables in this room.’ 

“‘Mr. Hudson,’ I replied boldly, ‘so far as 
I know there is nothing to eat in this room.’ 

“He gave me one scornful glance and began 
to search. 

“For half an hour he questioned and searched. 


226 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


Into every corner he peeped. At last he said 
icily: 

‘I seem to be mistaken. Goodnight.’ He 
then withdrew. 

“In the meantime, honest students, in the 
room below, poring over the annals of ancient 
Rome, were aroused from their studies by the 
gentle flapping of some white object against the 
window pane. Their studious frame of mind 
prompted them to investigate the strange phe- 
nomenon. 

“I draw the veil over the result of their in- 
vestigations. Even now that memory saddens 
my heart. 

“We above, when the tutor had departed, 
built up the fire and got out our pan, ready to 
warm up our bird after having exposed him to 
the cruel winter winds. I opened the window, 
drew up the pillow slip, and opening it wide, I 
drew forth a picked carcass, a bundle of bones 
neatly tied, and a placard which had this sim- 
ple, homely motto on it: 

“ Thanks ; that was a good one. Send down 
another.’ ” 

A peal of laughter greeted Mr. Hoyt’s story. 

“Tell us another, Mr. Hoyt,” came the re- 
quest from all directions. But Mr. Hoyt shook 
his head, sadly. 

“It brings to me too many memories of things 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


227 

loved and lost.” Then gaily, ‘‘Mr. Jackson, let 
us hear from you.” 

“I cannot paint a picture of college days, such 
as you have done,” began Mr. Jackson, “be- 
cause I belonged to the new fangled set. But 
our days were not without incident. We had in 
our faculty a man admired by all the students. 
He made himself agreeable to the boys and 
joined in their games whenever possible. It so 
happened that his keen sense of humor permitted 
him to laugh slyly at those unexpected incidents 
with which students sometimes enlivened the 
dull profession of teaching. 

“But ‘the Doctor,’ as we called him, was sel- 
dom the victim. His shrewd good sense saved 
him. Being a younger man, he found compan- 
ionship among the older boys. One night he 
started with two students to visit a friend in the 
village. There was a short cut across a field 
from the campus to the house. It was a dark 
night. The Doctor was leading the way. One 
of the students called out, ‘Doctor, go slowly. 
I think there is a barbed wire fence across here 
somewhere.’ The Doctor promised to be care- 
ful. Very soon his foot struck some object. 
Feeling about, he said, ‘Yes, here must be the 
fence, for here is a stile.’ He mounted the three 
steps which he had found. But not being able 
to find the way to descend on the other side, he 


228 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


called out, ‘Hazzard, strike a light.’ Hazzard 
did so, and there, in the middle of the field, with 
no fence of any sort near, balanced on one foot, 
and reaching about with the other, stood the 
Doctor, on the top step of a little wooden, three 
tiered flower stand. 

“Hazzard being very good at description, 
and Charles, his companion, being equally de- 
sirous that the lamp of truth should shine where 
it would do the most good, were not reluctant to 
relate the incident to the whole college. But 
the Doctor laughed with the rest, and the affair 
was forgotten, but only by those who never 
heard Hazzard tell it. And Hazzard has never 
ceased telling it.” 

“Good,” said Mr. Hoyt, as the laughter sub- 
sided. “I should like to know that Doctor. 
Does he like to fish? If so, I’ll hunt him up. 
Come, now, Mr. Sumner.” 

Mr. Sumner hesitated. “You have a good 
store, Mr. Hoyt. It’s your turn again.” 

“Please, Mr. Sumner,” urged Miss Catherine. 

Mr. Sumner yielded. “In the little college 
that I attended in Massachusetts, there was one 
member of the faculty, who lived a quiet, do- 
mestic life. He had an admirable wife, and they 
were much respected in the community. It was 
noised about the college one day, that in the near 
future, Mr. Eaton and his wife would celebrate 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 229 

their twenty-fifth wedding anniversary. This 
news caused some activity among the students. 
They learned that it would occur on Saturday, 
May eighteenth. In the noon mail of that day 
were many large envelopes addressed to various 
members of the faculty and to many people liv- 
ing in the village. They read, simply: 

‘‘ ^Mr. and Mrs. Eaton desire the pleasure of 
your company for dinner at six o’clock, on the 
evening of Saturday, May eighteenth, being the 
twenty-fifth anniversary of their marriage.’ 

“As the people read their cards, the usual com- 
ment was something like this: ‘How character- 
istic of Mr. and Mrs. Eaton. They wanted 
their friends, but they gave them no opportunity 
to plan for a gift.’ 

“So Mr. and Mrs. Faculty, and Mr. and Mrs. 
Townsfolk, dressed in their best clothes, began 
making their way to the hospitable home of the 
Eatons. The President of the college arrived 
first, which he deemed it his duty to do. It was 
a few minutes before six. Mr. and Mrs. Eaton 
received them graciously, and were pleased with 
the congratulations of the courteous President 
and his kindly wife. Very soon other members 
of the faculty began to arrive. Mr. and Mrs. 
Eaton, with quiet friendliness, greeted them and 
asked them all to be seated. When the towns- 
folk arrived the company spread from sitting 


230 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

room and parlor, by sheer force of numbers, in- 
to the dining room. A faint odor of fried onions 
was noticeable in the dining room, which was 
adjacent to the kitchen. 

^^Still the door bell rang, and guests were ad- 
mitted until the house could hold no more. Mr. 
and Mrs. Eaton were becoming embarrassed. It 
was now half past six, and the guests were grow- 
ing hungry and uneasy. Had Mr. and Mrs. 
Eaton overestimated their facilities for entertain- 
ing? There was a general flutter of that spar- 
ring and padded conversation, all according to 
the rules, and no one playing off-side. At last the 
disturbed Mrs. Eaton seized her nearest friend, 
one whom she trusted, took her to the kitchen, 
into the very remote corner, and pleadingly said, 
Tlease tell me what we are to do? What does 
this all mean?’ Her friend gave a gasp, a great 
light dawning. She blurted out the question, 
^Did you not invite us to dinner?’ 

“Mrs. Eaton turned pale. Why, no. I have 
asked no one for dinner.’ The friend said firmly, 
‘Mrs. Eaton, go right to your husband and stand 
beside him. I’ll fix this.’ In a moment Mrs. 
Eaton took her place. The friend got her own 
husband, and whispered a few words to him. 
I am sorry to say, he gave a short convulsive 
faugh. She then said to her nearest neighbors, 
the Professor of Latin and his wife: 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


23! 

‘Please do exactly as I do, and ask no ques- 
tions.’ 

“She stepped up to Mr. Eaton and holding 
out her hand, said so clearly that every one in 
the room could hear: 

“ ‘We have enjoyed this privilege of greeting 
you, in your house, on this occasion. I wish you 
both all good things.’ 

“Her husband did likewise, and they started 
for the door. The Professor of Latin and his 
wife, amazed but obedient, did the same. The 
other guests, stunned, followed like so many 
sheep. Soon ihe house was empty, and a group 
of students, lounging at the nearest corner, as the 
procession of departing guests drew near, started 
the gentle college song, which begins: 

“ ‘How can I bear to leave thee.’ 

“The students later took up a collection among 
themselves to pay for printing and postage.” 

“Mr. Sumner,” said Miss Catherine, her eyes 
sparkling, “I think that was real mean of you.” 

It took Mr. Sumner some time to explain how 
innocent was his part in the affair. He had 
merely suggested it. Others had carried it out. 

Cries of “Mr. Kinsman, Mr. Kinsman,” were 
heard. He knew it was useless to refuse, so he 
began at once. 

“When I was in Kenyon, it was in the old days 
before the college was equipped so beautifully 


232 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

as it is today. We carried our own fire wuod, 
and hauled water from the pump. The fine old 
dormitory building, with its associations of many 
famous men, was a veritable fortress of massive- 
ness and strength. College life within those 
gray walls was very intense. College spirit ran 
high. In summer nothing was more beautiful 
than the great, ivy-covered building, looking out 
over the green campus and the long row of trees 
on the middle path. The view up and down the 
valley from the college windows was a never 
failing source of pleasure to the tired student, 
lying in his broad window seat. For the thick 
walls made possible a window seat upon which 
many a student spent the night in sleep. 

‘‘There was one fellow in our class at Kenyon, 
who was a practical joker. It was he, who open- 
ing a package in his room and finding a dozen 
of his room mate’s pictures, just delivered by a 
photographer, sent one to each of twelve girls 
at Harcourt School, the young ladies’ seminary 
in the village. Henry it was, likewise, who stole 
into a room where a senior was taking an after- 
noon nap, and set his watch and clock three hours 
ahead. The senior had been invited to dinner 
with the President at six. Upon waking, he saw 
his clock and watch both pointing to half past 
five. At three o’clock exactly, he presented him- 
self in evening clothes at the President’s door. 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


233 


It was Henry, also, who bored a hole in the floor 
of one room and through the ceiling below, and 
each year when a freshman occupied the room 
below, and was in his bed slumbering peace- 
fully, it was this same practical joker who 
poured a cup of molasses through a funnel 
directly on the sleeping freshman’s placid face. 
Henry urged the freshmen to learn their Cate- 
chism and then sent them to the embarrassed 
President to recite it. He, likewise, with 
assistance, during the absence of the occupant, 
moved every scrap of furniture from one 
room across the hall into another room, and 
set it exactly as it had been. They took every- 
thing but the stove. When the occupant re- 
turned, he was dumbfounded to find his room 
empty, and equally dumbfounded to find his ef- 
fects in perfect order across the hall. It took 
that fre^iiman three days to decide whether it 
were easier to move his furniture to his stove or 
move his stove to his furniture. He was not 
without conflicting advice all suggested by our 
joker. It was his same original genius that 
prompted him, one winter’s night, to turn the 
college bell upside down, fill it with water and 
allow it to freeze. The imprisoned clapper on 
that bell awoke no students the following morn- 
ing. Henry always organized the annual ‘snipe 
hunt,’ in which a poor freshman, who had been 


234 the young crusaders 

invited to join a large party of upper classmen, 
was taken after dark by a devious path to a field 
and there left in a corner to hold a sack into 
which the others said they would soon drive the 
‘snipe’ from the further sides of the field. The 
upper classmen quickly made their way home. 
The freshman followed more leisurely. Henry 
invented the practice of telling the freshmen 
that after Church all freshmen were expected 
to walk home with the girls from Harcourt 
School on the very first Sunday, thus promoting 
that friendliness which ought to exist between 
the college and the girls’ school. He would 
stand on the side lines after service, and watch 
the embarrassed efforts of a few freshmen to 
break into that line of girls, a line jealously 
guarded by the vigilance of a whole corps of 
sharp-eyed teachers. But, like all jokers, he 
once ventured too far. He had tried his skill 
on Big Dave, a true blue Irishman, from County 
Tyrone. Henry, openly, in a small group, 
planned a midnight supper, at which he assigned 
to each fellow, some eatables. To Dave he as- 
signed lemons, sugar and crackers. Each fellow 
was supposed to provide what was assigned. To 
all but Dave he gave some secret instructions. 
When the boys appeared about ten, their pack- 
ages were placed unopened on a table. All but 
Dave’s. His lemons were soon made into lemon- 


ABOUT THE CAMPFIRE 


23s 


ade, sweetened by the sugar. He then told Dave 
to pass his crackers, and to open the other pack- 
ages. Dave did so, but the other packages con- 
tained nothing but old collars, empty bottles, 
and such non-eatables. Dave furnished the 
whole feast. 

“Dave planned to get even. He looked 
Henry the joker, squarely in the eyes, and prom- 
ised him a fair return. Henry only laughed. 
One night, a few weeks later, Dave summoned 
all the boys except Henry to his room. Dave 
then made them keep silent while he arranged 
something in the hall. The halls were dark, and 
every once in a while a boy would stumble over 
some obstacle. Henry had been particularly an- 
noyed by this, and had sworn that if anything 
were left where he should stumble over it, he 
would throw it out of the window. 

“Dave soon returned, and said, ‘There’s a 
trunk across the hall; now for some fun.’ 

“He then looked out of his door, and called: 

“‘Henry, come quick!’ 

“Henry, on the floor below, and eager for any 
excitement, dashed up the stairs and ran along 
the hall. In a moment he was on the trunk. 
Headlong he went across it, onto the floor. 
There was a resounding crash as Henry struck 
the floor. We all waited breathlessly. Henry, 
evidently so mad he could not speak, picked up 


236 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

the trunk, and hurled it down stairs. He fol- 
lowed and hurled it down a second flight and 
out onto the stone steps. Then seizing a stick 
of firewood, he battered that trunk for five min- 
utes. 

^‘Appeased, somewhat, he came upstairs 
through the hall, and into Dave’s room. Dave 
was calmly smoking. The other boys were ap- 
parently unconcerned. 

‘You fellows think you’re bright. Well, I 
carried out my threat, and I don’t care which 
one of you is the loser. There’s not enough left 
of that trunk to start a fire with.’ 

“Dave said, calmly, ‘Sit down, Henry. That’s 
all right. We are not offended. It was your 
own trunk, Henry, that I borrowed for the oc- 
casion.’ 

“Dave was avenged.” 

As Mr. Kinsman finished, the bugle blew 
Tattoo, and the boys hastened to their tents. 
The others voted the evening a success, and pre- 
pared to depart. The ladies were escorted to 
the farm house, and the men and boy officers 
returned to camp. 

That night about ten, Joe and Tom reported 
to Mr. Kinsman, and then with blankets and 
oilcloth and knapsack, and carrying a pickaxe 
and a spade, they quietly left the camp. 


THE DISCOVERY 


237 


CHAPTER XIX. 

THE DISCOVERY AT THE SENTINEL. 

Tom and Joe soon 
reached the “Sentinel,” 
and prepared to spend 
the night. They were 
tired and at once fell 
asleep, wrapped in their 
blankets. They had 
spread their oilcloth cov- 
ering near the fine old 
tree, and they had felt 
a sense of protection in 
doing so. 

When the sun’s rays began to penetrate the 
forest early in the morning, the boys were 
aroused. Joe raised himself up, and looked at 
his watch. It was not yet four o’clock. But he 
knew that they had a hard task before them, so 
he called to Tom and prepared to get breakfast. 

Carefully scraping away leaves and sticks 
from a large area, Joe took his pick and roughly 
dug up the earth in a circle about a yard in 
diameter. This was done to prevent the fire 
from spreading. In the center of the circle he 
placed dry leaves and small sticks, and soon a 



238 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

cheerful little fire was blazing. It gave forth a 
grateful warmth to the boys who felt the damp- 
ness of the sharp morning air. For by this time 
Tom was up and busy with the food supply they 
had brought. 

It took but a few minutes to arrange two 
forked sticks in the ground on opposite sides of 
the small fire. A large green branch, cut from 
a tree near by, furnished a stout pole to serve as 
a cross bar. Upon this Tom hooked the small 
tin pail in which he had brought the coffee 
which Blewie had made for them. He toasted 
a few pieces of bread at the coals, and on a small 
piece of tin, which he had fastened to a cleft 
stick, he fried some pieces of bacon. 

If you have never tried fried bacon between 
pieces of toast, on a cool morning, out in the 
open, then you do not know what a feast is. 
Joe and Tom ate with great relish. The coffee 
was very good and the spirits of the boys rose 
as they ate. 

Carefully cleaning their utensils, they pre- 
pared to make the investigation for which they 
had come. 

Tom again took the compass and in daylight 
verified the observations made before at night. 
Now they had a tape measure, borrowed from 
Blewie, who had many unusual things in his kit. 

At exactly ten feet from the tree, to the east. 


THE DISCOVERY 


239 

they began to dig. Tom took the pick and Joe 
the spade. The ground was well packed and 
progress was slow. They decided to dig a trench 
about two feet wide. After half an hour of 
effort, Joe remarked: 

“Tom, we must be down three feet. Get the 
measure.” 

Tom put a stick into the hole and measured. 
They were but twenty-seven inches down. With 
renewed vigor they began to go deeper. Soon 
the hole was three feet deep. 

But there was nothing to be seen except the 
hard earth. 

“This is a big job, Joe. If anything is buried 
here it may not be within a yard of this hole. 
Let me see the diagram again.” 

Tom looked at it long. 

“Joe, you and I are babies in reading ciphers. 
Do you see this circle? It has the letter W to 
the right of N or North, and has not East at all. 
I believe that is a blind put there purposely 
to confuse a searcher.” 

“That’s so,” said Joe. “Do you think that our 
treasure, whatever it is, is actually west of the 
tree?” 

“I do,” answered Tom. “I think Uncle Ezra 
purposely said east when he meant west. The 
diagram shows W in the wrong place.” 


240 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

“That means another hole,” was Joe’s sad 
comment. 

After careful measurement, the boys began 
to dig again. Slowly they worked; the heap 
of earth on the side grew higher and higher. 
Joe would work in the hole for a time only to 
give place to Tom. 

Suddenly a blow from the pick in Tom’s hand 
seemed to rebound. Surprised, Tom struck 
again at the same place. The pick had struck 
an obstacle. 

“Joe,” said Tom, in an excited whisper, as if 
awed, “I believe I have found something.” 

The two boys frantically dug into the earth 
with their hands. Sure enough, they uncovered 
a black, flat surface. With hearts beating fast, 
they endeavored to learn the nature of the ob- 
ject. But they could not without further dig- 
ging. 

“Tom, we must dig around this thing to get 
it out. We might as well go to work systemat- 
ically.” 

Ten minutes’ work revealed a stout, wooden 
box, somewhat rotted from being buried. It 
was about a foot and a half long, and a foot wide. 
They could not yet determine its depth. Still 
they worked on until they were able to insert 
their fingers under the end of the box. Lifting 
with all their strength, they loosened the box 


THE DISCOVERY 


241 

from its bed, and with great rejoicing placed it 
on the green grass. 

The boys were so startled by the success of 
their efforts, that for a long time neither ven- 
tured to hint at further investigation. 

“What do you suppose is in it, Joe?” 

“No idea. It is a good, strong box.” 

“Ought we to open it?” 

“I don’t know. We might break off a corner.” 

Acting upon this suggestion, Tom struck the 
box with the pick and loosed a board. Curiosity 
now overcame them, and they uncovered one 
side. The box seemed to contain nothing but 
paper. Pulling this out, they reached a small 
despatch box. Joe held this up and looked at it. 

“Here is our mystery, Tom. I presume we 
ought not to try to open this. We ought to take 
it to Uncle Russell.” 

“We have a whole day to ourselves, Joe. What 
time is it?” 

“Eight o’clock.” 

“Let’s catch the train for Portage, and see your 
Uncle Russell.” 

The boys quickly acted upon this suggestion. 
They wrapped the tin box in paper and made 
their way to the river, then along the bank to the 
railroad track. They soon reached the station. 
The train was not due for three-quarters of an 
hour. 


242 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Tom suddenly exclaimed, ^‘Joe, have you 
any money?” 

“Not a cent.” 

“Neither have I.” 

Joe, without a word, scrambled to the top of 
the box car. 

“Tom, of all luck. There are some fellows 
on the hill, doing signal practice. Get a news- 
paper from the agent.” 

joe climbed down, and found a stick. He 
fastened upon it the paper which the agent had 
given Tom, and again mounted the car. 

He was unsuccessful at first in attracting 
attention. Soon, however, the boys on the hill 
stopped signaling. Were they watching? 

Joe waved his improvised signal flag, “Y. C. 
— Y. C. — Y. C.” That was the camp call. 

At once came a response, “Yes.” 

Joe then sent his message. 

“Ask Mr. Kinsman to please send orderly 
with one dollar to station. Warren.” 

The answer came, “O. K.” 

It was but a few minutes before Pat McGuire 
wheeled up before the station with a crisp dol- 
lar bill in his hand. 

Tom wrote a little note to Mr. Kinsman, say- 
ing they were going to Portage on important 
business but would return on the afternoon train. 


THE DISCOVERY 


243 

Pat wheeled away, and the boys bought their 
tickets and soon were in the train. 

On arriving at Portage they went directly to 
Colonel Russell’s house. He was at home, and 
received them in the library. 

Joe went at once to business. 

“Uncle,” he said, “Tom and I found this box 
buried at your farm. We have brought it to 
you.” 

“Bless my heart 1” exclaimed the Colonel. 
“Where did you find it?” 

Joe drew out the parchment and quickly told 
the story. Uncle Russell listened quietly but 
with great interest. 

“We shall open this box,” was his only com- 
ment. 

Uncle Russell then sent for Jerry and a pair 
of Stout pincers, and the lid was soon pried off. 

Inside the box was a small package wrapped 
in oiled silk, with the name “Ezra Russell” 
printed on the white tape with which it was 
bound. 

Cutting the tape the Colonel unwrapped the 
silk and found three envelopes. One was 
marked “Personal” and the second had no mark. 
These envelopes were filled with papers. 

The third envelope was not so well filled, ap- 
parently. It had close fine writing on it. 

The Colonel read it: 


244 the young crusaders 

“In case of my death, whosoever shall find 
this box and deliver it to Colonel Russell or any 
reliable attorney, unopened, shall be entitled to 
the contents of this envelope.” 

“Well, boys, I guess that envelope is yours,” 
he said, handing it to Joe. 

Joe took it, looked at it, and gave it to Tom. 

“It’s part yours, Tom, whatever it is.” 

Tom held it a moment and handed it back. 

“You open it, Joe.” 

With trembling fingers, Joe opened it. He 
drew out a heavy bit of folded paper, and un- 
folding it he found it was covered with printing 
and scroll work. 

“What is it, Uncle?” 

The Colonel gave but one glance. 

“It is a stock certificate for two shares in the 
Portage Bank. It is worth about four hundred 
dollars. It has been signed in blank for trans- 
fer. Each of you is virtually owner of one share 
of the bank stock. I congratulate you.” 

The astounded boys hardly believed their 
senses. They were getting their reward. Joe 
asked Uncle Russell to keep it for them until 
they returned from camp. 

“You are sure it is ours?” 

“Quite sure. As to these other papers, I shall 
take time to go over them carefully, and I shall 



THE YOUNG PEOPLE BEGAN TO ENJOY THEMSELVES 







/ 


THE DISCOVERY 


24s 


go out to the camp on Sunday. You may ex- 
pect me. I shall then tell you what I find. I 
want to say, too, that I think you deserve your 
reward for your efforts.” 

The boys left exultant. we are rich,” 

said Tom, excitedly. “I may be able to go to 
college now.” 

“And 111 go, too, Tom.” 

So planning and rejoicing in the culmination 
of their efforts, they went to their homes for 
lunch. The families were surprised to see them. 
The boys did not tell the secret, but said that 
business had brought them home. 

They took the afternoon train and reached 
camp in time for supper. They quietly re- 
ported to Mr. Kinsman. 

“Well, boys, was it a wild goose chase?” 

“No, sir, it was a great stroke of luck. We 
cannot tell you about it now, but we shall be- 
fore the camp ends. Colonel Russell will be out 
on Sunday.” 

The guests again visited camp after supper. 
The long twilight gave much opportunity for 
pleasant walks and conversations. 

Warren and Louise Seymour strolled up the 
hill and sat and watched the activity of the camp. 

“We were at the camp to see the drill this 
morning. You were not here. I thought the 
Captain had to be on hand,” began Louise. 


246 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

“Joe and I were excused this morning.” 

“Uncle was asking for you. He said he did 
not see you at breakfast.” 

“No, we were not at breakfast. Did you en- 
joy the drill?” 

“Now, see here, you are trying to change the 
subject.” 

“Not at all; Joe and I were not here this 
morning.” 

“Uncle said he looked into your tent to find 
you before breakfast, and the other boys said you 
had not been there all night.” 

“No, Joe and I were on special duty.” 

“Please tell me about it,” said the fair Louise. 

“Well, we had permission to go away for 
twenty-four hours. We left at 10 last night.” 

“Didn’t you get any sleep?” 

“We slept in the woods under that big tree,” 
pointing at it. 

“What, you two boys in those woods?” 

Tom was compelled to tell of their camp in 
the woods and their breakfast. He did not give 
any clew to their errand, however. 

In the meantime the other girls and a squad 
of boys had gathered around Mr. Hoyt, near the 
fire. 

Pat had been a gallant courtier to Elsie, when 
he had the chance, and he and Joe were now do- 
ing the honors. Pat as usual was eager for fun. 


THE DISCOVERY 


247 

“Joe, it isn’t true that you were sent home this 
morning, is it?” 

“You know better than that, Pat.” 

“I was afraid Miss Elsie would hear the re- 
ports, and would think ill of ye, Joe,” said Pat. 

Joe indignantly gave Pat a scorching glance. 

“Miss Elsie knows who’s more likely to be 
sent home.” 

“Now, I don’t think either of you will be sent 
home,” was Elsie’s cautious remark. “You are 
too much needed in the camp to make things 
lively, so I hear.” 

But Pat was not disturbed. “Joe was not in 
camp last night. I was afraid Mr. Kinsman 
might hear of it.” 

“Mr. Kinsman knew of it. Stop your non- 
sense, Pat,” and Joe began to warm up. 

“That’s all right, Joe, me boy, you’re intirely 
blameless. We said that at once. We are all 
your friends, Joe.” 

Joe was now thoroughly worked up. Forget- 
ting all the consequences, he blurted out: 

“Tom and I spent the night under the tree in 
the woods, and went into Portage this morning.” 

“Oh, that’s it, is it?” and Pat gave Joe an in- 
dulgent look. “So you see. Miss Elsie, they 
were not robbing chicken roosts.” 

“No, indeed” asserted Elsie. “I did not be- 
lieve that.” 


248 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Joe, with a queer look in his eye, asked rather 
too gently: 

“What time is it, Pat?” 

Pat pulled out his watch. “It is just seven.” 

“Have you noticed Pat’s watch, Miss Elsie? 
It has a beautiful case.” 

Elsie tried to look at it. Pat hastened to re- 
turn it to his pocket. 

“Let Miss Elsie look at it, Pat. He’s lucky 
to have it. He almost lost it as we started. Has 
Pat told you about it?” 

Pat turned red, and said, “Oh, it was noth- 
ing.” 

But Elsie insisted. “Please, Mr. Patrick, I 
should love to hear,” and she did hear. Joe saw 
that no detail was omitted. 

In the meantime, Edith and Margaret Stevens 
were toasting marshmallows at the fire and hand- 
ing them to all who applied. There were 
many applicants. Mr. Hoyt and the others had 
a second meeting at Headquarters, but Mr. 
Kinsman and Anna were sitting quietly by them- 
selves. 

“I have told you the whole story, Anna. If 
we can ever get trace of the money my father 
sent home, it would make my mother independ- 
ent.” 

“Well, John, we will hope. I know you arc 
working hard. But I shall wait.” 


THE DISCOVERY 


249 


The evening passed rapidly and pleasantly. 
The visitors left as taps sounded, and the solitary 
sentry paced up and down, gun on shoulder, 
thinking of the splendid days and glorious nights 
of Camp Crusader. 




250 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XX. 

EZRA RUSSELL’S TRUST. 

On Sunday, true to his 
word, Colonel Russell 
appeared at camp. He 
came in his carriage, for 
he still clung to the ve- 
hicle of his fathers. He 
was accompanied by an 
elderly lady, who proved 
to be Mr. Kinsman’s 
mother. Mr. Kinsman 
^ w a s greatly surprised 
and delighted. Mrs. 
Kinsman lived in Cleveland, with a sister. The 
Colonel explained that he had thought she might 
want to see the camp, and had taken the liberty 
of asking her to take the morning train from 
Cleveland to Lynn’s Crossing. He had there 
met her with his carriage. 

Colonel Russell inspected the camp, compli- 
mented the boys and made himself very agree- 
able to the officers. Mr. Hoyt’s whole party had 
made arrangements to stay until camp broke up. 
They had found delightful quarters at Mr. Win- 
ter’s and at another farm house near by. 



EZRA RUSSELL'S TRUST 251 

When the usual Sunday visitors had gone, 
Colonel Russell asked if he might have the 
privilege of entertaining the members of the 
camp with a story. They were all ready for 
this, and Mr. Sumner proposed that they bring 
out chairs and cots and gather about “Head- 
quarters” to hear the Colonel. 

It was an interested company of listeners. 
Seated just inside the tent were Mrs. Kinsman, 
Mrs. Hoyt and Mrs. Marshall. Mr. Jackson 
had provided a comfortable place for Marion 
Hoyt, and the other girls likewise had no lack 
of attention. The boys made a great circle of 
cots about the outer edge of the group and sat 
quietly listening. No boy went swimming. They 
were all anxious to hear the Colonel. 

Colonel Russell stepped before them and 
after bowing to the ladies, began his narrative. 

“I fear that I may have to begin by telling 
some facts that may be known to many of you. 
I hope you will not grow tired if my story seems 
somewhat long. 

“My brother, Ezra Russell, owned this farm. 
He was a good, true man, but one who loved 
variety and change of scene. He would spend a 
year in travel, and would then retire to this place 
to enjoy the beauties of simple rural life. In the 
course of his life he went all over the world, vis- 


252 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

iting every country in turn, but always returning 
to this farm. 

“At his death his farm came to me by his will. 
His old house I have moved to a spot more con- 
venient to the road and it is let to tenants. I be- 
lieve some of these charming young ladies are 
lodging there for the time being. 

“I must now begin another story. There is 
in my house in Portage a large attic. The use 
of this I granted to my nephew, the famous 
aviator, and here he built ‘Darius Green,’ his 
glider, and here he conducted the experiments 
by which he rendered me a great service at the 
risk of his own neck. My nephew Joe also in- 
terested himself with Uncle Ezra’s effects, 
mostly curios from foreign lands, which were 
stored there. In his investigations, he dis- 
covered this bit of paper.” 

Here the Colonel held up the cipher. All 
looked at it curiously. 

Colonel Russell then proceeded to tell the 
story of the way in which the boys found the key 
to the cipher, and also found the box under the 
“Sentinel.” The listeners were intensely inter- 
ested, and the boys gasped with astonishment. 

“There were two envelopes in that box which 
I have examined with great care. They con- 
tained papers, many of which were of a personal 
nature. One of them was an interesting state- 



•VISITOR’S DAY AT ‘CAMP CRUSADER 



^ ■» 


•if , 

■ ^ u. • 


» s.' M 




.-v‘> ' 

* 1 

* • > 


• . % 

•t 


- \ 






“* « 


J . 







r • ,.-^. 


» . 


, 4 ;^ J 

■< ' 


* " 

• t 


X 


V •-’» 






4 ' 


•rf* > 

. A 






. • 




♦ 


«•'* * 
f * ’ ' . 


I 

%' 


f '1 


'^U 


•«. 















• ri 


•I 





v> ^ 


I 


'• /. 




> - 


A' 



, V • 


> 


y\ 


* i< 



t 


- \ ’ 

A 


; .i-v 


A» 

# 

X . 


V‘. 


* » 


«' .•;2* * ^ ' 


1 ^ • , 


T V * 

V- . i ' 


. r - 

* 1 : '■» 


_4* 



' * • * 




I* 

^ * 




i: 




> -I 






'* . 




i> - 



. ^- 


» • 


’ t 


t *. 


r 


VI 

v-j, 


■ -*;■ 


I'- ?. 


f ♦.■ • 

t <w • ♦: 


3% . 

!► J • 









k •• < 

* *“1 


/ 

'■■v'; V >/ 










• • 

\ 


^ * k f • 

> h 


, r* 


I ^ 


' - :!tr 



'X 


W •».■ 

- • . A - • 

- A. ' 


I 


■' * ' • v • • 


si 


. » 

» / 


■i. ^v* 

» •« •*“ 




/ 

« k 


4 ^ 


; ^ 


'-r- •-■ 






»_ 






“ y 




^ •. < • 


, •! 


r^% 

M 


tt * 

* ^ 


'IP A. 

: • * s 


} - 


V V 


^ t 


>•. 


/■ 1 V . 

'y-S • • ~- •. ' • 

^ y. . 


> • 


• I • 

^ ^ 


I 


. «. 


A 

•t 


A>. f 








. 4 


» 


I 

A. 


. -1 


» 

• * 




A 


EZRA RUSSELL'S TRUST 253 

mcnt which I shall read. This was written by 
Ezra Russell : 

“ ‘Should any one, by any chance, ever dis- 
cover the fact that I have buried this box, I want 
him to learn likewise my reason for doing so 
strange a thing. I have but few valuable papers. 
They are mostly in the Portage Bank. But I 
have in my keeping a strange story and a strange 
trust. I am writing now at the old farm, where 
I have been staying, doing my best to disqharge 
that trust. All the papers relating to it I have 
with me. But I have been suddenly summoned 
from home. I have no time to put these papers 
into safe keeping. I am afraid to leave them in 
the house or to take them with me. So I am 
burying them by the Sentinel. On my return I 
shall dig them up. I realize this paper may 
never see the light of day.’ ” 

The Colonel paused. “It did see the light of 
day, and through a strange bit of foresight on 
Ezra Russell’s part. On his return to Portage 
from that errand, he made this cipher and put 
it in his tin box. He knew that should anything 
happen to him, I should be the one to open the 
box. I remember very well the day I went with 
him and he put this paper in, smiling as he did 
so. ‘There’s a puzzle for you,’ were his words. 
‘Use the signal code.’ 


254 T'HE young crusaders 

“So it would have been no puzzle, had I 
found the paper, for as young men, Ezra and I 
learned and often used the signal code. It was 
only a few days after his return, and as we now 
know, before he had time to dig up the box, 
that he died very suddenly. 

“But I did not find the mysterious paper, for 
it was beneath the false bottom of the box, as you 
know. It remained for Joe to do that. So the 
despatch box has been buried all these years. 

“I hope you will be patient with me,” said the 
Colonel, “if I seem to make the story long.” 

“You have interested us extremely. Colonel,” 
said Mr. Hoyt. “Please do not neglect a single 
detail.” 

The Colonel continued: “A second paper 
found in the envelope contained a strange story. 
I shall read it to you.” The Colonel unfolded a 
paper, and read: 

“T, Ezra Russell, certify that the following 
it an exact and true statement. 

“ ^On a steamer in which I was traveling to 
Aden, as we were crossing the Indian Ocean, I 
was summoned by the ship’s Captain to visit a 
lick man who desired to talk with an American. 
I was ushered into his stateroom. The Captain 
had left us, and only the Doctor was there. The 
man was unconscious. The Doctor, a German, 


EZRA RUSSELL'S TRUST 255 

laid to me, “This man is dying; he has been ask- 
ing for an American; he wishes to ask a great 
favor of him. This dying man may never re- 
gain consciousness, but I know what he wants. 
If he were conscious, he would ask you to take 
this package to his family.’’ 

“ ‘The Doctor held up a small package. It 
had no name or address on it. It was so small I 
could easily slip it into my pocket. I summoned 
the Captain and told him of our strange predic- 
ament. An American Consul was on board on 
leave of absence. We took him into consultation. 
He agreed to be equally responsible with me for 
the safe delivery of the package. We instructed 
the Doctor to learn the address of the family if 
the man regained consciousness. But the man 
never rallied. The same afternoon he died. 

“ ‘That night our boat struck a hidden reef, 
and a battle began with the great sea. It is 
not necessary to give the details. The boat was 
rapidly sinking when we were taken off by a 
passing steamer. I saved only a handsatchel, 
but the package was in it. All clue to the dead 
man’s identity was gone. The ship’s records 
were lost; the package alone might give a clue. 
I examined it, and found a thousand pounds in 
English bank notes, and a letter. 

“‘Upon returning to America, I put the 
money in a bank in trust, and made every effort 


256 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

to discover the identity of the man. I was un- 
successful in my search. The money is still in 
the bank. May the good God grant that it may 
find its rightful owner. Signed, 

“ ‘Ezra Russell.’ ” 

The Colonel paused. He held up a little 
book. “Here is the very book which has been 
buried in the ground all these years. It is a pass 
book of a Cleveland bank. Yesterday I went 
to Cleveland. The money is still there awaiting 
the owner. 

“The letter that Ezra Russell found with the 
money was one written by a boy. I will not 
read it, but I consulted Uncle Ezra’s journal 
yesterday, also, and found out more about that 
wrecked ship. I learned the port from which it 
sailed. This information may prove valuable. 

“I wish to say that I did read this boyish letter 
yesterday with rising interest. It was dated, but 
no address given and it was signed by no name. 
As it lay on my desk, I was struck by the similar- 
ity between the writing and that of a note I had 
received but a few weeks ago. 

“Added to that,” continued the Colonel, “was 
the evidence of a story I had heard in Portage 
a while ago in regard to one of our most useful 
and esteemed citizens.” 

Here the Colonel paused. 


EZRA RUSSELUS TRUST 257 

“Ladies and gentlemen, I am willing to state 
my own conclusions, which can be easily veri- 
fied.” He added, slowly and solemnly, “That 
wrecked ship had sailed from Melbourne, Aus- 
tralia. The dying man was Richard Kinsman. 
This bank book is the property of John Kinsman 
and his mother.” 

For a moment a gasp of astonishment arose 
from the crowd. John Kinsman buried his face 
in his hands. Mrs. Kinsman turned ashy pale, 
although the Colonel had somewhat prepared 
her for such startling news. A great light sprang 
into Anna Marshall’s eyes. The whole group 
broke into cheers that resounded over the 
camp. Everybody insisted on shaking hands 
with Mrs. Kinsman and her son, and many who 
understood, shook hands with Anna, also. 

For an hour the excitement continued. Colo- 
nel Russell was asked to read Ezra Russell’s 
statement again. John Kinsman saw his letter 
written ten years before and remembered every 
word of it. 

Finally he was composed enough to make a 
statement to the rejoicing friends. 

“My mother and I wish to say that we arc 
most grateful for your kindness. We can never 
sufficiently thank the boys and Colonel Russell 
for throwing light on what was to us a great mys- 
tery. 


258 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

“We are more than thankful for definite news 
of my father, and his peaceful death, than we 
are for the money. But this was rightfully his 
and now it is mother’s. It is proper to rejoice 
that a good man, for such he was, should be 
known to have lived honorably and to have died 
with such a true-hearted countryman at hand as 
Ezra Russell.” 

Nothing else was talked of in camp that night. 
Colonel Russell drove back to town taking Mrs. 
Kinsman and Mrs. Marshall with him that he 
might arrange for the legal steps which would 
be necessary. 

John Kinsman and Anna took a long walk, in 
which they had a slight dispute about the rela- 
tive merits of July and October. Mr. Kinsman 
was a firm advocate of the glories of July, and 
he won the debate at last. 

Mr. Jackson and Marion saw them return. 
“See how radiant they are, Mr. Jackson.” 

“They will be married within a month, that’s 
my guess.” 

“No doubt,” was the response. 

“What are you going to do, Mr. Jackson, this 
summer?” 

“Oh, I have a great plan,” was Mr. Jackson’s 
whimsical answer. “I am going to buy a dozen 
spades and spend the summer here digging up 


EZRA RUSSELUS TRUST 259 

the whole place to see if Uncle Ezra left me a 
fortune, too. I envy John.” 

‘‘You envy him his money?” 

“Not at all ; his fortune.” 

Marion, surprised into a blushing smile, said 
sweetly: 

“Good luck to you; come, we must join the 
others.” 

And Mr. Jackson thought long about her 
words. 


26 o the young crusaders 


CHAPTER XXL 

A RUNAWAY. 

On Monday afternoon, 
Pat McGuire and Dick 
Brewer took a long walk 
toward the village of 
Plainville, which was 
about four miles distant. 
They were in excellent 
spirits and went briskly 
along the road, stopping 
now and then to pick the 
ripe raspberries that were 
abundant in the fence 
corners. Every time they passed a farm wagon, 
both boys, according to the custom of the 
country folk, exchanged greetings with the 
travelers. The staid farmer and his wife gen- 
erally exhibited a startled curiosity in regard 
to the two soldier boys, who so politely saluted 
them. 

As they drew near to Plainville, they saw in 
the road ahead of them a horse and wagon, with- 
out a driver. The horse was wandering slowly 
along the highway, nibbling at the tall grass. 
Upon drawing near, the boys saw that the wagon 



A RUNAW^AY 


261 

contained grocer’s supplies. But they were scat- 
tered over the bottom of the wagon. Baskets 
had been upset, and broken eggs and butter, 
sugar and vegetables, were mixed together. 

Pat took the bridle, while Dick made a casual 
survey of the ruin in the wagon bed. 

“This has been a runaway, Pat. Sec those 
groceries?” 

“It seems more like a walkaway, now. This 
horse must have bumped this wagon against 
every stone for a mile.” 

“There’s no house near here. It probably 
came clear from Plainville. Jump in, and we’ll 
drive back.” 

They mounted the seat, and Pat, taking the 
reins, turned the horse about. As they jogged 
toward the village, Pat remarked : 

“I feel like Caesar in his chariot, entering 
Rome in triumph, with the spoils of victory.” 

“The spoils of many a family dinner, rather,” 
suggested Dick. 

They had gone but a short distance, when they 
saw two men in a buggy, rapidly driving towards 
them. The driver reined in his horse upon 
reaching them, and a very angry man, bare- 
headed and wearing a grocer’s apron, leaped 
to the ground. He raised a threatening fist 
toward the astonished boys. 

“I’ll teach you young rascals to destroy my 


262 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


property,” he shouted. “You will find your- 
selves in jail in less than ten minutes. Get 
down off that wagon,” and he began to drag 
Dick from the seat. 

“But — but — but — ” stammered the frightened 
Pat, as he rose, preparing to leap from the other 
side of the wagon. 

“Don’t make any excuse to me. You have 
done enough damage for one day. For two 
cents I’d give you a good thrashing,” and he 
reached for the short whip. 

“Hold on, Green,” exclaimed the man in the 
buggy. “You are too excited. Put up the whip.” 

Green hesitated a moment. Pat and Dick 
were too scared to speak, or run. 

“Look at those groceries. Ten dollars’ worth. 
You’ll pay for them, every cents’ worth,” and 
again the angry grocer shook his fist at the boys. 

“But we didn’t do it!” almost shouted Pat. 

“That’s a pretty thing for you to say. How 
came you on my wagon, then?” 

“The horse was coming this way and we 
stopped him.” 

“You may tell that to the Justice of the Peace. 
Hatch, take those boys with you, and drive in. 
I’ll drive the wagon.” 

Mr. Hatch gave the boys a quiet look. 

“Come on, boys. Better get in.” 

The boys did so, and the cavalcade started for 


A RUNAWAY 


263^ 

\ 

Plainville. Mr. Hatch proved a kindly manj 
and he listened to their story. They were reas-| 
sured by his manner, and explained to Mr.' 
Hatch about the camp, their walk, and the find- 
ing of the horse and wagon. 

“Well, boys, just take my advice and simply 
tell how the thing occurred. You needn’t tell 
who you are if you don’t want to. I saw that 
old wagon at the store half an hour ago. I also 
saw some boys about, but I knew every one. 
I’ll clear you.” 

Mr. Green seemed to grow angrier as he 
neared home. He was a ridiculous figure on his 
bespattered wagon, and he knew it. As they 
drew up and stopped at the store, a curious 
crowd gathered about them. 

“I have them,” he shouted. “I am going to 
make an example of the young rowdies who stole 
my wagon.” 

Mr. Hatch took the boys, one by each arm, 
into the store. Both Pat and Dick were cooler 
now. They knew they were innocent, and they 
had a friend. The crowd followed. It chanced 
that the Justice of the Peace was there, and Mr. 
Green at once began: 

“Squire, those rascals druv’ away my horse 
and wagon. I want ’em sent to jail.” 

The crowd was plainly in sympathy with Mr. 
Green. Strange boys were looked on with sus- 


264 the young crusaders 

picion. There were many expressions of ap- 
proval of Mr. Green’s desire to lock up the boys. 

“They ought to be licked first.” “Make an 
example of them.” 

In the meantime Mr. Hatch had gotten the 
Squire’s ear for an instant. The Squire seated 
himself in a big chair near the stove. Every 
barrel and box was occupied, and the villagers 
and farmers crowded about the counters. Mr. 
Green looked with visible displeasure at the 
practiced hands that were dipping into the open 
cracker barrel, but he dared do nothing while 
public sentiment was on his side. 

“I guess we can see about this right here,” 
began the Squire, with the ghost of a grin 
toward the boys, who were still under the pro- 
tection of Mr. Hatch. 

“What are your names?” 

Pat answered promptly: 

“Patrick McGuire, yer honor.” 

“And yours?” 

“Richard Brewer.” 

“Mr. Green, will you please state your 
charges?” continued the Squire. 

“I will. My wagon was filled with groceries, 
ready to be delivered, and these young mischief- 
makers got in, drove of! down the road, and 
were actually on the wagon when I overtook 
them,” and Mr. Green’s anger arose, as he spoke. 


RUNAWAY 


265 

Pat started up as if to reply, his face very red, 
but Mr. Hatch held him, saying quietly, “Wait.” 

Mr. Green’s charge evidently had its effect on 
the group, as they were more unfriendly than 
ever. It seemed as if the boys might be facing 
a charge of theft. 

“Young men, what have you to say to that? 
You, McGuire, first.” 

But Mr. Hatch interposed. 

“Will you permit me to say a word. Squire? 
I drove Mr. Green out to recover the wagon.” 

“Certainly.” 

“Does Mr. Green swear to his testimony?” 

“It is assumed that he is telling the truth.” 

“But he is somewhat excited,” said Mr. Hatch, 
“and perhaps would like to modify his state- 
ment. He said these boys got into his wagon in 
front of the store, and drove off. Did you see 
them?” turning to Mr. Green. 

“Didn’t we see them on the wagon, Mr. 
Hatch? You were there.” 

“Yes, they were on the wagon, a mile from 
towm. But you did not see them here.” 

“What if I didn’t? They had the wagon.” 

“Quite right, Mr. Green. Another point. 
You said we overtook them.” 

“Why, you know we did. You drove me out.” 

“Yes,” was Mr. Hatch’s reply, “but you have 
led your friends here to believe that the boys 


266 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


were driving away from town. In fact, they 
were driving toward town, were they not?” 
guess they were,” admitted Mr. Green. 

“That’s all for the present. Squire. Thank 
y )u.” 

“Now, McGuire,” said the Squire, “what 
have you to say?” 

Patrick had by this time realized that they 
were in no great danger of being jailed, as the 
questions of Mr. Hatch had put Mr. Green in a 
very curious position. The crowd showed more 
signs of friendliness toward the boys, and were 
plainly impressed by Mr. Hatch’s questions and 
Mr. Green’s admissions. So he plucked up 
courage and began : 

“You see, yer honor, me friend and I were 
a’walkin’ along the road, when we see a horse 
coming along, pulling a wagon. There was 
no driver. The horse was a’stoppin’ now and 
then and a’croppin’ at the grass. Tt’s a horse,’ 
says I to Dick. ^No,’ says Dick, 4t can’t be a 
horse. It’s too thin. It’s a toy ladder.’” 

“Order,” said the Squire, as a laugh arose. 
Mr. Green was now very red in the face. 

“ ‘Dick, it’s a horse and wagon,’ says I. So 
we looked in the wagon and, sure, there were 
dozens of eggs, all broken, mixed with other 
groceries. Tt’s no florist’s wagon, Dick,’ says 
I, a’holdin’ my nose, ‘Eggs is eggs,’ says Dick. 


A RUNAWAY 


267 

We turned the horse about and being willing 
to sacrifice ourselves, we got on the wagon and 
drove toward town. We met Mr. Hatch and 
the owner of the eggs coming in a buggy. 
They brought us here.” 

Pat had plainly won the crowd. Even the 
Squire could not maintain his dignity, but 
laughed. 

Mr. Green glowered; he was evidently losing 
favor. 

“I should like to add. Squire,” said Mr. 
Hatch, ‘‘that I believe the young man has told 
the truth about his actions.” 

“Where do you live?” asked the Squire. 

“In Portage.” 

“What are you doing here?” 

“Merely taking a walk through the country,” 
was Pat’s evasive answer. He did not wish to 
connect the name of the Young Crusaders with 
the exploit. 

At this point one farmer arose, an elderly 
man, and addressed the Squire: 

“Squire, these boys are innocent. I can see no 
reason for your holding them a minute. Mr. 
Green has acted unfairly. The boys did him a 
favor. I am glad to know you,” and he sol- 
emnly shook hands with Pat and Dick. 

The Squire arose, saying, “You are quite 


268 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


right. You are released, young men.’’ He like- 
wise shook hands with them. 

The embarrassed boys were now the center 
of a group excitedly chatting over the affair. 
All but Mr. Green. He sullenly went to the rear 
of the store, and pretended to be very busy. 

Mr. Hatch escorted the boys from the store, 
saying: 

‘‘Come over to my house for a little while,” 

He lived in a pleasant house a short distance 
away on the village street. Mr. Hatch brought 
out some apples and invited the boys to a rustic 
seat in the side yard. They told him more of 
the camp and did not forget to thank him for 
his kindness to them. 

Mr. Hatch said that Mr. Green was an ava- 
ricious man, very irritable, and hasty tem- 
pered. He had been known as the meanest 
man in Plainville. 

“You see that lot over there. It belongs to 
me. For two years Mr. Green has wanted it, 
and he offers me only three hundred dollars. 
The lot is worth five hundred dollars and I 
should like to sell it at that price. But he knows 
that I am a poor man, and he thinks if he waits 
long enough I shall be forced to sell. And I 
may, although I do not want to at that price.” 

Pat and Dick could not stay very long, as they 
had to return to camp in time for flag lowering. 


A RUNAWAY 


269 

They were obliged to take the afternoon train 
to Lynn’s Crossing, and walk on from there. 

Their new found friend went to the train with 
them. They thanked him again, and asked him 
to visit them. The villagers on the station plat- 
form waved them a farewell as the train pulled 
out. 

On the road from Lynn’s Crossing, Pat spoke 
hardly a word. He was deep in thought. As 
they turned in at the lane, he said, merely: 

^^Dick, that man Green will hear from us 
again.” 

^What will he hear, Pat?” 

‘T don’t know yet, but trust me, Richard, me 
boy.” 

They told no one of their exploit, as they did 
not want to have the facts known. 

That evening there arrived in camp a young 
man inquiring for Dick Brewer. It was his 
older brother, Ralph, who was a surveyor for 
the Valley Electric Traction Co. Ralph Brewer 
had been working in the neighborhood and had 
come to spend the night with Dick. He had his 
instruments, transit, reading rod, and flag pole. 

Pat and Dick told Ralph of their adventure 
in Plainville. He laughed about it a good deal. 
He showed the boys his instruments, and allowed 
them to run a few levels about the hill. 

During the evening Pat was seen to be deep 


270 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

in thought. The usual festivities seemed to have 
no attraction for him. About eight o’clock he 
sought out Dick and asked him if he and his 
brother Ralph would take a walk into the grove. 

Ralph readily agreed, and the two boys and 
the young man went a short distance from camp 
and sat under a maple tree. There Pat began: 

‘‘Mr. Brewer, have ye much to do tomorrow?” 

“Not much, Pat. I had planned to go to 
Portage some time during the day.” 

“Would ye be willing to take a day off, and 
go to Plainville with Dick and me?” 

“Would you be allowed to go?” 

“I think if ye asked Mr. Kinsman for permis- 
sion to take us for a day’s work surveying, that 
he would allow ye to do it. Ye know he tried 
to teach us a little about it last year.” 

“I’ll ask him, Pat. But what do you want to 
do?” 

Pat here unfolded his plan. Ralph Brewer 
listened attentively. It was a plan worthy of an 
ingenious Irish lad. But Ralph was doubtful. 

“You can never do it, Pat. It won’t work.” 

“It will do no harm to try, and we’ll enjoy 
the day.” 

“Well, we can try and hope for the best. But, 
Pat, the burden of it rests on you.” 

“Thank you, Mr. Brewer. I’ll do my best. 
And now I’ll have to do some more thinking.” 


A RUNAWAY 


271 


They made their way back to their tents. Mr. 
Brewer asked Mr. Kinsman, and received per- 
mission to take the boys the next day. For the 
policy of the Wardens was to grant as many 
privileges as they could without interfering with 
the discipline. 

Pat and Dick talked until the notes of Tattoo 
sounded over the camp. They agreed that they 
would not tell of their experience in Plainville, 
not because they were ashamed of it, but because 
they wished to keep the name of the Young Cru- 
saders out of it. They were proud of their or- 
ganization. The incident concerned themselves 
alone. 

Pat did not go to sleep early that night. His 
busy mind kept going over the events of the day. 
He hoped to let Mr. Green hear from him, as 
he had promised. His thinking was not in vain, 
and when he raised his red head from the pillow 
at the sound of Reveille, it was filled with ideas 
that made him chuckle with glee. 


272 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XXIL 

PAT’S REVENGE. 

Immediately after 
breakfast the three con- 
spirators set forth for 
their day’s work. Pat 
carried the transit, while 
Dick took the flag pole 
and the reading rod. The 
flag pole was an iron rod 
about half an inch in 
diameter, and pointed at 
one end. It was painted 
red and white, so that it 
could be easily distinguished when planted in 
the ground. Each one had been provided with 
a substantial lunch by Blewie. 

The boys walked to Lynn’s Crossing, greeting 
Mr. Winter, who was in his yard, as they passed. 
They caught the early train toward Cleveland, 
and alighted at Plainville. It was yet too early 
for the villagers to be about the station, so they 
made their way toward the open country with- 
out attracting any attention. 

After getting away from the village they 



PATS REVENGE 


m 

rested under a tree by the roadside to further 
develop their plans for the day. 

“We must be very careful not to allow our- 
selves to be discovered this morning by anyone 
but Mr. Green. How we are to manage it I 
don’t know,” and Pat stood looking with per- 
plexity toward Plainville. 

“Does he drive his delivery wagon himself, 
Pat?” asked Ralph Brewer. 

“Probably. I saw no clerk in his store ex- 
cept a young lady.” 

“I have an idea,” exclaimed Dick. “Ralph, 
you go to his store and buy something, and ask 
if he could deliver it. Get a barrel. Have it 
brought right here.” 

“I might try that.” 

So Ralph went quickly into the village. 
Plainville was a very small place, and had but 
four or five stores altogether. They were all on 
the main road. 

Mr. Green was behind the counter when 
Ralph entered the store. The faithful horse was 
tied to a post before the store, ready for its day’s 
work. 

“Good morning,” was Ralph’s cheerful greet- 
ing. 

“Morning,” came the rather gruff response 
from the store keeper. 


274 the young crusaders 

‘‘Would you sell me an empty barrel and de- 
liver it?” asked Ralph. 

Mr. Green looked for a moment at Ralph, as 
if weighing his chance for profit. 

“Where does it go?” 

“Down the main street past the station to the 
edge of the village.” 

“Huh! That would be worth fifty cents.” 

Ralph paid the fifty cents, and then added : 

“We should like to have it in twenty minutes.” 

“All right; I’ll get it to you.” 

Ralph hastened back to the boys who were 
awaiting eagerly the word as to the success of 
his errand. 

“He will deliver a barrel here, but I don’t 
know that he will come himself.” 

Hastily he set up the transit, and sent Dick 
about loo feet toward the village with the read- 
ing rod. It was but a few minutes before the 
horse and wagon appeared on the scene, and, as 
good luck would have it, driven by Mr. Green. 
Curiosity had gotten the better of the grocer, 
and he had come to find out what a man wanted 
with an empty barrel on the country road. 

As Mr. Green pulled in his horse, Ralph was 
sighting through the telescope of the transit and 
waving his hand right and left. Pat stood near 
with a field book and was apparently taking 
down readings. 


PATS REVENGE 275 

^^Here’s your barrel.” 

Both looked up. Mr. Green at once recog- 
nized the boy whom he had practically arrested 
the day before, but he said nothing. He had be- 
come very curious as to the reason for a survey 
over that road and he did not care to open hos- 
tilities. He did want to know, however, what 
the surveyors were there for. 

“Thank you,” said Ralph. “Pat, put the bar- 
rel on the grass near the fence.” 

“What are you surveying for?” blurted out 
Mr. Green, whose curiosity could no longer be 
restrained. 

“I’m not at liberty to tell you, now,” and 
Ralph looked up again. “Have you twine at 
your store?” 

“Yes, certainly.” 

“Pat, ride back with the gentleman, if he will 
let you, and get a ball of twine.” 

Mr. Green was only too ready to have Pat go 
back with him. He might be able to discover 
the reason for the survey. 

“Come on, young man. I reckon I was pretty 
hasty yesterday. Climb right in.” 

“May I drive, sir?” asked Pat, demurely, 
winking at Ralph. 

“Of course. You’ve driven this horse before, 
eh?” and Mr. Green gave a dry chuckle. 

Pat took the reins. “He won’t run away, will 


276 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

he?” Mr. Green glanced at Pat to see if he 
were making fun of him, but Pat’s face was 
sober. 

“No, drive ahead.” 

As they jogged back to the store, Mr. Green 
began to try to win Pat’s favor, and at the same 
time to learn what he could. 

“Do you like surveying, young man?” 

“Very much. Especially on this part of the 
route.” 

(“This part of the route.” What did that 
mean? was the grocer’s quick thought.) 

“Your name is Patrick McGuire, isn’t it?” 

“Yes, sir. Just the same as yesterday.” 

“Do you live in Portage?” 

“Yes, sir. I still live there.” 

“Is the older man with you, your employer?” 

“Not exactly. He works for the Valley Elec- 
tric Traction Co. I mean, — I mean, — ^when he 
works,” said Pat, as if he had spoken too hastily, 
“but he is not working now,” and here Pat gave 
evidence of trying to explain something away. 
“He is out for pleasure now, sir.” 

A light came into Mr. Green’s eye. So this 
survey was for the Traction Co. What did this 
mean? 

“Did you come here on the morning train, 
Patrick?” asked Mr. Green. 

“Yes, sir. You can get into Cleveland sev- 


PATS REVENGE 


277 


eral times a day, can’t ye, sir, by the train?” 

“Yes, indeed. Gedup,” and Mr. Green let 
the whip fall on the horse’s back. This pro- 
duced no result whatever. 

“It will be fine when you can get to Cleveland 
once an hour,” reflected Pat, as if thinking 
aloud, and then, suddenly, as if realizing he had 
revealed a secret, “but trains will never run as 
often as that, so I guess you will have to be sat- 
isfied,” and Pat gave a glance at Mr. Green, as 
if he had made a fine recovery from his apparent 
mistake. 

Mr. Green, thinking that Pat was well on the 
way to tell all he knew, said but little. They 
got off the wagon at the store, and Pat selected 
his ball of twine. As he drew the money from 
his pocket to pay for it, a bit of paper came with 
it and fell to the floor. Pat paid no attention. 
He wandered to the back of the store where he 
had stood trial the day before. 

Mr. Green, now very pleasant, offered him 
some candy which Pat accepted. Strolling along 
by the counter, Mr. Green suddenly stooped and 
picked up the paper. 

He gave one glance at it and hastily put it in 
his pocket. Pat very soon said “Good bye,” and 
went back to the others. 

Mr. Green, when Pat had gone, sat in the 
chair by the stove and looked long and hard at 


278 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

the paper. It was a little diagram showing 
Cleveland, Plainville, a few other villages, and 
Portage. A line was traced from Cleveland to 
Portage, passing through Plainville. On the 
bottom of the sheet, were merely the initials 
V. E. T. Co. 

“That’s the Valley Traction Co.,” exclaimed 
Mr. Green, with rising interest. “They are sur- 
veying for a line through Plainville, sure as 
fate.” 

His jaws set, and a hard look of intense de- 
termination came into his face. 

“That means that every foot of property here 
will double in value.” Here Mr. Green walked 
rapidly to the rear of the store, opened a door 
into the living apartments, and called : 

“Mandy, Mandy, you watch the store. I am 
going out for an hour.” So saying, he took a 
roll of bills from the safe and left the store. His 
way led to the home of Mr. Hatch. As he 
walked he thought rapidly. Mr. Hatch was in 
his yard, as Mr. Green approached. 

“Good morning, Mr. Hatch,” and his pleas- 
ant greeting was quite in contrast with his re- 
cent behavior. “Have you a moment to spare?” 

“Certainly, Mr. Green.” 

“I have been thinking over that bit of land 
yonder. I guess that I ought to buy that land. 
Do you still feel like selling?” 


PATS REVENGE 


279 


“Of course.” 

“What will you take, cash down?” > 

Now Mr. Hatch knew Mr. Green, and he 
thought that he had better name a price some- 
what higher than he would accept in the end, 
so that he might “dicker” if necessary. 

“I’ll take six hundred dollars, now, Mr. 
Green.” 

When Mr. Hatch said “now,” Mr. Green 
gave him a sharp glance. Did he know of 
the proposed electric line? If he did, he was 
offering the land at a small valuation. He must 
need the money. Mr. Green knew that others 
would willingly give six hundred dollars when 
the news leaked out. The land was worth at 
least five hundred dollars even now. 

“I’ll buy it!” exclaimed the grocer, to the as- 
tonished Mr. Hatch. “Come over to the 
Squire’s.” 

Too bewildered over the transaction to talk, 
and rejoicing over his good fortune, Mr. Hatch 
went to the Squire’s, where he signed a land con- 
tract with Mr. Green and received six hundred 
dollars from him. 

In the meantime Pat went back to the others. 
They drew nearer to the village, and sat under 
a tree where they could see Mr. Green’s store. 
When Mr. Green emerged and hurried along 
to Mr. Hatch’s home, the boys laughed with de- 


28 o the young crusaders 


light. They watched the two men go to the 
Squire’s office. When Pat saw Mr. Hatch leave 
the Squire’s and return to his house, he could 
restrain himself no longer. He made a dash 
down the street and into the yard. There was 
Mr. Hatch solemnly counting over his money. 

‘‘Ah, it’s my friend Patrick McGuire. You 
see a happy man here. I have just sold my lot 
for six hundred dollars.” 

Pat gave a great shout and hurled his cap into 
the air. It was too good to be true. He shook 
hands with Mr. Hatch and congratulated him. 
It was with difficulty that he restrained himself 
from telling the whole story. All he said was: 

“Please come around to the store about eleven, 
Mr. Hatch. I want you to meet another friend 
of mine.” 

Pat then hurried back to the surveyors. At 
ten o’clock they went again to the edge of the 
village and Ralph set up his instruments. 

In the meantime, Mr. Green could not keep 
the news. He astonished several of the villagers 
who had gathered about the store, with the 
statement: 

“Do you know that they are surveying for an 
electric line through Plainville?” 

An explosion would not have produced a 
greater sensation. The news spread rapidly. It 
even reached Mr. Hatch, who was more per- 


PATS REVENGE 


281 

plexed than ever. He realized that if that were 
true, he had sold his land very cheap. He 
talked the matter over with the Squire, and it 
was not long before the village knew that Mr. 
Green had been indulging in sharp practice in 
buying the lot. He had learned of the line be- 
fore Mr. Hatch knew anything about it. 

When the surveyors appeared at the lower end 
of the street near the station, there was a mild 
sensation. A curious group followed them as 
they worked. 

‘‘We will take the railroad track as the new 
base, Pat.” 

Pat put the reading rod on the track and 
Ralph went about two hundred feet with the 
transit. Quickly he leveled it and sighting the 
rod, motioned Pat to raise the target. When it 
was properly adjusted, he called out: 

“What’s the reading?” 

“Six feet, four inches.” 

“Put that down, Dick. Back-sight six feet 
four inches.” 

Pat then ran past the transit to a point two 
hundred feet beyond. Resting the reading rod 
on a stone, he waited. Ralph quickly swung 
the transit and sighted. 

“There. What’s the reading?” 

“One foot, two inches.” 

“Fore-sight one foot, two inches, Dick.” 


282 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


As if thinking aloud, Ralph made the calcu- 
lations : 

“Elevation of track from Cleveland datum, 
421 feet, plus back sight 6 feet 4 inches equals 
427 feet 4 inches minus fore sight i foot 2 inches 
equals 426 feet 2 inches. New datum is 426 feet 
2 inches, Dick.” 

Dick made the entry. Ralph then carried 
the instrument about three hundred feet past the 
reading rod. This brought him in front of Mr. 
Green’s store. Ralph called Pat to him and to- 
gether they looked over the figures. The crowd 
gathered closer and questions began to fly. 
Everyone was in good humor, but there was an 
undercurrent of feeling against Mr. Green. 

Finally the Squire began to ask questions. 

“You are the boys who were here yesterday 
charged with mischief?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

Mr. Green interposed, “It’s all right about 
that. Squire. Patrick cleared himself.” 

The Squire paid no attention. “We folks here 
think mighty kindly of you two young men. 
Would you mind telling us a little of what you 
are doing here?” 

“Not at all,” answered Pat, “but as we are 
here on Mr. Green’s property, would he not like 
to tell you himself?” 

Mr. Green felt at once his importance. He 


PATS REVENGE 283 

cleared his throat, glanced about the circle, and 
began : 

‘‘Neighbors, I am glad to say that the coming 
of these young men means that Plainville is 
about to enter into a period of prosperity. We 
are to have one of the greatest of blessings in a 
rural community, an electric line. Today these 
skilled surveyors are plotting the way through 
this thoroughfare. I have reliable information 
that they represent the Valley Electric Traction 
Co. I congratulate you on the enterprise.” 

There was slight clapping of hands. But Mr. 
Green was not in favor. The Squire turned to 
Pat. 

“Can you confirm this statement, McGuire?” 

Pat gave a hasty look about. He saw suspi- 
cion in many a face, and knew that the crowd 
was prepared for a disappointment. Mr. Hatch 
was watching him closely. 

“Gentlemen of Plainville. Ye can never tell 
how an innocent amusement may be miscon- 
strued. My friend here,” pointing to Ralph, “is 
in the employ of the Traction Co., but he is on 
his vacation. Taking pity on the ignorance of 
us two boys, he planned a day’s outing for us, 
with a little practice in surveying. Having had 
such a warm welcome in your village yesterday, 
we thought it would be a pleasure to come again. 
We know absolutely nothing about an electric 


284 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

line, but we would be glad to use our influence 
to help ye get one. Thank ye.” 

There was a great uproar. Mr. Green made 
an angry move toward the boys but was re- 
strained by many hands. 

At last Mr. Hatch made himself heard. 

“I wish to say, friends, that I knew nothing of 
these boys being here today until after I sold 
my land.” 

‘‘That’s all right, Hatch,” came a dozen voices, 
“we know you.” 

“Young man,” said the Squire gravely to Pat, 
“you live in Portage. I think I know your 
father. What business is he in?” 

“The real estate business, sir. But we must 
go. We return by this train.” 

Escorted by the whole group except Mr. 
Green, the boys went to the train and were soon 
in camp. They kept their story to themselves. 

The next day a wagon loaded with apples, po- 
tatoes, and every conceivable supply, arrived in 
camp, and Mr. Hatch was driving. 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 285 


CHAPTER XXIII. 

BUILDING THE MONUMENT. 

On Wednesday morn- 
ing Mr. Kinsman ad- 
dressed the boys at in- 
spection, and told them 
how pleased he had been 
to take them to camp. 

‘‘It seems too bad for 
us to leave this delight- 
ful spot without placing 
here some permanent 
monument that will mark 
the location of our camp. 
In order to carry out this idea, the Wardens 
have made preparation. We ordered from 
Portage on Saturday materials necessary to 
build such a monument. Mr. Winter has gone 
to the station and he will bring them here. 
We have decided to build upon the hillside a 
large cross made from the boulders, of which 
there are so many in the bed of this creek. 
We shall ask the help of each boy in this 
project. Under the direction of Mr. Jackson, 
each boy will carry five boulders to a spot 



286 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


indicated; further work will be done when Mr. 
Winter arrives.’^ 

It was not long before the hillside was a scene 
of busy activity. Each boy was faithfully doing 
his part of the work; boulders of all colors, 
shapes and sizes were soon being hauled from 
their long resting place in the creek bed, to a 
rapidly growing pile fifty feet up the hillside. 
In the meantime, Mr. Jackson had detailed four 
boys to dig a hole, and two others to go to the 
neighboring woods and select a straight young 
sapling three or four inches in diameter. They 
were to cut it and bring it to the camp. Scarcely 
had they completed their tasks when Mr. Win- 
ter drove in. Upon his wagon were four large 
sacks of Portland cement and three iron bars, 
five feet long. The rest of the wagon bed was 
filled with white, sharp sand which he had been 
able to secure somewhere in the neighborhood. 

As Mr. Winter could not cross the creek with 
his horse and wagon, it became at once a prob- 
lem how to carry the heavy bags of Portland 
cement to the place where they were needed. 

The boys were struggling with the heavy 
sacks, unable to get a firm hold upon them, when 
Pat McGuire rushed up with a look of disdain 
on his face. 

“What babies you are when it comes to work. 
You fellows don’t know enough about machinery 



IT WAS NOT LONG BEFORE THE HILLSIDE WAS A SCENE OF BUSY ACTIVITY 







LKlT'^f jif^ -;r‘'-^LV^,-^^^ 'V^ 4-*s:iAVXv •• - '• ^ ±\ ^ x^' Jr 



Si?<n - a-.- ■ - 

.. if.>^,/iiC ' . .r -• -L , . 

^' :• V ‘ V:‘ ^'- . >'• --^^o- 
-*“'5 ^ ' 

.V 

’'Jr' \’u '■: 


n:^-. • : >>. 

S1|*V « ■ '^' ■ . •' ‘ >‘ ‘•r.s, V--r 'T ■’.»*•! '*“ 

m ■ »; •■■■v■■ >“.^■v ;■ ::-ii« 


. t 

‘4 V 


>^.r 








- - 

w>h 


wN’ /?•• ■>* 3 L 
S* -■ 

V •- .. , 

*• ^ /*•♦• V 

fc k ^ ■' ' iW 




*• * I f 





^j! ^ ’ 

4 _ jr^T,..'; 










- fc'-'^ 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 287 

to run a wheelbarrow. If you give me permis- 
sion, Mr. Jackson, I will see that those sacks get 
over to the hillside without loss of life or limb 
to either sack or boy.” 

Mr. Jackson nodded, and Pat called out, “Ho! 
Red Cross Squad, man injured.” 

The squad, true to its training, dashed for the 
stretcher and the medicine chest. Rushing up 
to Pat, they prepared to take care of the injured 
man. Pat laughed and said, “Now you are go- 
ing to do something useful for the first time in 
your young lives. Place these sacks one at a 
time upon your stretcher and carry them over 
to that hole,” and he pointed up the hill. 

The boys caught the idea with a rush, and soon 
the faithful Red Cross Squad was toiling up the 
hill bearing upon its stretcher a sack of Portland 
cement. 

“You don’t need the medicine chest, do you, 
Pat?” asked Happy Potter. 

“Yes,” replied Pat, “we do. Give each of 
these unthinking youths a dose of ginger; they 
will need it if they are ever to complete this 
work before we break camp,” and Pat laugh- 
ingly reported to Mr. Jackson that he had 
made ample transportation facilities. 

But the sand yet remained on the wagon. Pat 
overcame this difficulty also, by borrowing a 


288 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


couple of pails from Blewie, and compelling 
each boy to carry at least one pailful. 

The actual work of building the monument 
now began. 

The Wardens found it necessary to direct this 
themselves. First the sapling was firmly planted 
in the middle of the hole and large boulders 
were placed about it, holding it securely in posi- 
tion. The hole was completely filled with these 
stones. One sack of cement was opened upon a 
few old boards and was mixed with the sand. 
This mixture was placed In a box, borrowed 
from Blewie’s kitchen, and water from the creek 
was added. After it had been thoroughly 
worked, it was poured upon the foundation 
stones until every crevice was filled with the 
cement. Thus the base for the monument was 
secured. 

The sapling projecting about eight feet from 
this base was to be the guiding line about which 
the monument would really arise. 

It was now dinner time and the hungry boys 
needed no second signal to stop work. It was 
thought advisable t© postpone further building 
operations until later in the day so that the ce- 
ment might set. 

In the afternoon the boys had their sham bat- 
tle as usual and then went swimming. Upon 
their return to camp, the Wardens asked the of- 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 289 

fleers for an hour’s help. Soon the Captain and 
his lieutenants were mixing cement and carry- 
ing water. Very carefully now the lower arm 
of the cross began to rise upon the Arm founda- 
tion base. It was about two and one-half feet 
broad at the base and about eighteen inches deep. 
It was built about the sapling, entirely conceal- 
ing it. The stones were set with great care, 
and mortar was freely used to hold them in place. 
The monument tapered slightly as it rose, be- 
coming narrower toward the top. When the 
arm had reached the height of flve feet they 
stopped. It was necessary to allow the cement 
to harden before further progress could be made. 

As the camp was now in its closing days, it 
was thought desirable to allow a little more 
liberty, and a great party had been arranged in 
Mr. Winter’s splendid barn. 

After supper all the boys, with the exception 
of the unfortunate guard, made their way to the 
barn for the evening frolic. All the guests were 
there and several young ladies also, whom Mr. 
Kinsman had invited at Mr. Winter’s sugges- 
tion, from the neighboring farm houses. The 
frolic began with the “Virginia Reel,” in which 
the older members of the party joined, Mr. 
Hoyt leading with Mrs. Marshall. 

After this had come to a close, amidst much 
applause, Mr. Winter struck up a lively tune 


290 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

and the young people danced. Both Pat Mc- 
Guire and Joe Russell reached Miss Elsie 
Seymour at the same moment. Those about 
watched with interest to see which one would 
be the successful candidate for the first dance 
with Elsie. The usually nimble witted Pat 
for this one time faltered. Thinking to 
make a favorable impression, he preceded 
his request with a low bow, his hand upon 
his heart. The more direct Joe, seeing his 
advantage, said quietly, ‘^May I have this 
dance?” just as Pat’s red head had reached the 
lowest point on its journey toward the floor. 
Consequently Elsie was saved from the embar- 
rassment of making the choice between the two. 
Pat raised himself, the words of request upon 
his lips, only to realize that Joe had outwitted 
him. Pat noticed the look of amusement on the 
faces of those standing about, and recovering 
himself quickly, he said: 

“In order to be forehanded. Miss Elsie, I 
have come to ask for the pleasure of the dance 
after this one.” 

Elsie cordially promised it and Pat with an 
air of triumph as if he had really accomplished 
his original purpose made off to find another 
partner if possible. He was fortunate enough 
to secure one of the guests from the neighbor- 
hood, a very attractive girl named Margaret 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 291 

Stockton. Margaret was interesting and viva- 
cious. She had traveled extensively and enter- 
tained not only Pat but the older members of 
the party by her experiences. Some two hours 
passed gaily. Never were girls in greater de- 
mand. 

Finally Mr. Kinsman gave the signal to Mr. 
Winter, and the faithful orchestra ceased its 
labors. The whole company now sat down in 
a great circle upon the barn floor. Mr. Hoyt 
and Mr. Winter disappeared but in a few min- 
utes returned, bearing a huge freezer of ice 
cream which Mr. Hoyt had ordered from 
Cleveland. Plates of cake were brought from 
the kitchen. This was Mrs. Winter’s treat to 
the boys in appreciation of their assistance the 
week before. 

Mr. Hoyt was as usual the life of the party. 
After all had eaten he stood at one edge of the 
circle prepared to make a speech. “Ladies and 
gentlemen, never since the beginning of time, 
since ancient Rome was founded upon its seven 
hills has a more congenial company gathered 
under one roof, than this party of brave lads 
and fair maidens, assembled here tonight. Un- 
der the arching dome of star spangled night, 
(at fhV'Mr. Hoyt turned to Mr. Jackson and 
said: ^that’s pretty good, isn’t it’) under the 
arch of the rising moon whose gleaming rays 


292 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

will soon light us on our homeward wa^ we re- 
joice that we are permitted to be comrades and 
that we have formed friendships which will en- 
dure.” 

Here Mr. Hoyt nudged Mr. Jackson and 
winked at the others at the same time. 

‘^As we soon shall separate and go each to 
his duties, my earnest wish is that next year 
upon these same rolling meadows and on these 
same beautiful hills we may all meet again.” 

Here Mr. Hoyt gave a sweeping wave of his 
hand, made a profound bow and sat down. 

It seemed fitting that someone should answer 
for the camp. Mr. Kinsman looked at Mr. 
Sumner, and Mr. Sumner passed on the look 
to Mr. Jackson. Finally a voice from the circle 
called “Patl” The cry was at once taken up and 
the embarrassed Pat was almost forced to his 
feet. 

“Ladies and gentlemen,” began Pat, “I can- 
not put my thoughts into those magnificent 
words that Mr. Hoyt has used. We are grateful 
that he came here with his wife, his daughters, 
and his nieces, (and Pat bowed to each in turn, 
bestowing the last bow upon Elsie) to give a 
touch of beauty amidst so much ugliness (and 
here Pat waved his hand toward Joe). I hope 
we may meet again, all together or singly, espe- 
cially the latter.” 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 293 

Here the applause was so great that Pat sat 
dov^n in confusion. 

“What a beautiful sunset glow Pat’s hair 
sheds over his face,” was Joe’s only retort when 
he could be heard. 

The party soon broke up, the boys going to 
their camp, jubilant over their evening’s fun. 

The next day they resumed building opera- 
tions on the monument. The three heavy irons 
which Mr. Winter had brought were now 
placed across the upright arm as a support for 
the transverse bar of the cross. They easily sus- 
tained the weight of the heavy boulders that 
were placed upon them. This arm of the cross 
was made about eighteen inches high. After this 
was done work was resumed on building the 
upper arm of the cross. Finally the last stone 
was laid and the cross was complete. The cen- 
tral one of the three stones which capped the 
cross rested directly upon the top of the sapling. 
By good fortune it was found to be of graceful 
proportions and the boys gazed upon it with 
great pride. 

The same afternoon the formal ceremony of 
dedication took place. The whole company, in 
full uniform, gathered about the cross. The flag 
was saluted — then the cross, and Mr. Kinsman 
made a short address: “The permanent monu- 
ment of Camp Crusader! May it long stand 


294 the young crusaders 

to recall the glory of the days spent be- 
neath the protecting hills, in the quiet valley.” 

The night was another of those glorious 
moonlight nights of June, which tempt men to 
remain out of doors and with quiet rejoicing 
revel in the fascinations of lights and shadows, 
which transform every familiar object. 

The Wardens were under the spell of the 
magic mantle woven by the moon’s golden 
beams upon hill and forest. They stayed up 
very late to enjoy the last nights of camp. For 
the moon rose late. They sat upon the hillside 
above the white tents and talked of the boys, 
over whose lives they had had control for two 
weeks. 

‘‘Boys are worth while, Frank,” said Mr. 
Kinsman, addressing Mr. Sumner. “They have 
that quality of responsiveness that is so charm- 
ing in men and women. They do not show it in 
the same fashion. It appears in their acts rather 
than in their words.” 

“You are right, John,” was Mr. Sumner’s 
quiet reply. “They have an existence as yet un- 
disturbed by the cares of the world, and their 
whole being is absorbed in the affairs of the mo- 
ment. That picket is not indulging in a pas- 
time, or merely following a routine. He is 
guarding a camp. It is a serious business and he 



THE MONUMENT OF CAMP CRUSADER. LONG MAY IT STAND TO RECALL THE GLORY 
OF THE DAYS SPENT BENEATH THE PROTECTING HILLS IN THE QUIET VALLEY” 



f 


•» I 


\ 


\ 


I 


* 


f 





I 


V 

* - . * • 


« 


« 




4 







\ 


f 


i 






k 


4 


S 


S 




» 


I 


« 


I 


t 




P 


> 


i 


‘V • • -N 


* 


r • 




« ' 


' fi 

6 



I 


t 


4 


4 


BUILDING A MONUMENT 295 

knows it. Boys do not show their feelings very 
much, but they are deep and they will last.” 

Mr. Jackson sat silently gazing at the camp. 
After a moment he said, “We may think that we 
are doing this for the boys. How about our- 
selves? Has there been a minute which we 
have not enjoyed? Has it not been a pleasure 
to have shared in such an experience as this has 
been? Tomorrow night this little spot will be 
nearly as it has been for scores of years, silent, 
and deserted. But who can tell what forces have 
here been set in motion for the good of these 
boys, impressing the lesson of obedience and 
uprightness, and mutual help. As for myself I 
shall think of this place, with a pleasure that 
will not fade. And I believe those old trees 
and hillsides will somehow always seem unlike 
other trees and hillsides, because they have been 
taken into a human brotherhood, and have 
served a human purpose in bringing pleasure 
to us all.” 

It was with hearts full of sober joy that late 
that night the Wardens returned to their tents. 


296 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 


CHAPTER XXIV. 

BREAKING CAMP. 

Saturday morning was 
the time set for breaking 
camp. On Friday, there 
appeared an important 
looking gentleman who 
inquired for Mr. Kins- 
man. He was recognized 
at once as the Mayor of 
Portage. He explained 
that he had come to pre- 
sent the formal thanks of 
the city of Portage to 
the Young Crusaders for their skillful help, 
during the fire at the Tennant Building. 

The company was assembled and the Mayor 
made a speech and finally brought out a large 
silver medallion mounted on wood. The medal- 
lion had a suitable inscription engraved on it. 
The Mayor asked that it be hung in the meet- 
ing room of the Young Crusaders. 

Mr. Kinsman responded with a short speech. 
The Mayor remained to witness the usual sham 
battle. 



BREAKING CAMP 


297 


During the afternoon was held the drill on 
the manual of arms for the prize offered by the 
Wardens. Mr. Hoyt and the Mayor acted as 
judges. Hamilton, who had lost some of his 
confidence and had worked faithfully, won 
the prize. This was a small medal. 

The last night in camp was a joyous one. 
Games and races and singing enlisted the energy 
of most of the boys. The bonfire was built high 
for all the empty boxes in the kitchen were used 
as fuel. 

The young ladies, in fact, all the guests, vis- 
ited the camp as usual, and more stories were 
told. 

Early the following morning they began prep- 
arations for leaving. Each boy was told to 
pack his clothing, bedding and all personal ef- 
fects. The cots were carried one by one to a 
spot where the wagons were to be loaded. The 
boxes followed. Blewie prepared a last meal 
and set it upon the table. It was a cold lunch. 
A platoon of boys then attacked the kitchen and 
soon the stove and utensils were alongside the 
cots and boxes. Headquarters came next. 

About noon the wagons arrived on the scene. 
After lunch the loading began. The tents 
were still standing. When one wagon was 
loaded the company was assembled and instruc- 
tions were given. Each boy then went to his 


298 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

proper tent. The ropes were loosed and held 
by the boys. 

At a signal given on the bugle, they re- 
leased the tent ropes and the white city, their 
home for over two weeks, shrank to the ground. 
It gave them all a sense of desolation to see the 
emptiness of the camp street where they had 
spent so many happy hours. 

The tents were soon folded and put into the 
tent bags; the stakes drawn and the poles tied 
in bundles. Everything was loaded on the 
wagons. 

There remained but little to do. The com- 
pany was formed in a long line and it swep' 
across the camp site, picking up every scrap 
of paper, every bit of wood and every discarded 
article of any sort. These were placed on the 
bonfire. 

The company then took farewell of Mr. Ho3^t 
and his party, who were planning to return to 
Cleveland the same afternoon in the automobile. 

All were cordially invited to visit the Hoyts 
in Cleveland. Mr. Jackson was asked by Miss 
Marion when he expected to begin digging on 
the old farm. 

“Right away, but if I meet with no success, I 
may start to dig in Cleveland. May I have 
your permission to go there and search for my 
treasure?” 


BREAKING CAMP 


299 

Marion’s reply was heard by no one but Mr. 
Jackson. It is to be assumed that permission 
was granted for he did go to Cleveland the fol- 
lowing week, and later the report came that he 
had found what he sought. 

When Joe and Pat put on their coats to pre- 
pare to go to the train, it was seen that a button 
was missing from each coat, and in Elsie’s little 
purse two buttons reposed side by side. 

The company was formed on the camp site 
for the last time and a final salute was fired. 
Through the shady grove and oyer the dusty 
foad the company marched to the station. 

Pat stepped up to the agent. 

“Would ye take a telegram?” 

“Certainly,” said the agent. Pat wrote it 
carefully and signed his full name. 

“Mrs. Michael McGuire, Portage. — Look 
out for a soldier in full uniform and hungry. 

“Patrick Terence O’Neil McGuire.” 

The agent gave one look at the name. 

“Are you that there boy that sent some rub- 
bish about veg’tables over this wire the day you 
came?” 

“Perhaps I am,” was Pat’s answer. 

The agent gave him one long look and shook 
his head. 


300 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

‘‘Young man, you do be the genuine specimen 
of the disadvantages of iddicashun,” and he 
closed the office window. 

The sun-burned boys created the same com- 
ment on the train as on the trip to camp. As 
the train approached Portage the young soldiers 
realized how eager they were to get home and 
relate their exploits. There was quite a group 
of friends at the station, to meet them. They 
formed and quickly marched to the High 
School yard and after the Wardens had com- 
plimented them on their loyalty. Captain War- 
ren said but a single word, 

“Dismissed.” 

Camp Crusader had come to an end. 

^ ^ ^ ^ 

Tom and Joe walked home together, arm in 
arm. 

“Tom,” began Joe, “come around to Uncle 
Russell’s Monday morning. I have an idea.” 

“You are so full of ideas, Joe, that you are in 
danger of bursting,” laughed Tom. 

“Never you mind. This is a good one.” 

“What is it? Not a submarine boat, or a 
wireless piano player, or anything of that sort, 
I hope.” 

“You will see. Come over early.” 

That evening Colonel Russell entertained a 


BREAKING CAMP 


301 


party at dinner. Mr. Kinsman and his mother, 
Mrs. Marshall and Anna, Mr. Sumner and 
Mr. Jackson were there. There was much 
conversation about the camp and its incidents. 

Colonel Russell at length said, “I have made 
every arrangement, Mr. Kinsman, for you to 
claim what rightfully belongs to you.” 

“I have already done so. Colonel Russell,” 
said Mr. Kinsman, taking Anna by the hand, 
“and I shall take possession next month.” 

After congratulations had been offered, 
Colonel Russell proceeded. 

“You will find that your fortune has grown, 
by accrued interest. It is much larger than your 
book shows. But I hope you will remain in 
our High School.” 

“I shall,” was Mr. Kinsman’s firm answer. “I 
am too much interested in the Young Crusaders 
to leave Portage now.” 

And Anna Marshall, whose radiant beauty 
this night impressed all who saw her, gave him a 
look of gratitude, saying simply: 

“I am very glad we are to remain here 
among such good friends.” 

Colonel Russell continued: “I am to speak at 
our Chamber of Commerce banquet tomorrow 
night, and I shall take occasion to mention the 
Young Crusaders.” 

“You are to read a poem there, I believe, 


302 THE YOUNG CRUSADERS 

Colonel,” said Anna, with an appealing look. 
‘‘Would you not let us hear it now?” 

The Colonel was visibly embarrassed, but no 
one was able to resist when Anna asked a favor. 
He went to the library and returned with a 
small sheet of paper. Standing at the head of 
the table he began : 

“I have only once or twice in my life per- 
mitted myself to indulge in the luxury of writ- 
ing verses, and then only when prompted by a 
worthy subject and under deep emotion. But 
I accepted this task, and you shall hear the 
meager result. It is an ode to Portage.” The 
Colonel then read: 

“Our Father’s blessings free 
Have been bestowed on thee, 

Portage, our pride; 

Thy beauty never fails. 

Shrined midst thy hills and vales; 

O’er thee sweet peace prevails 
On every side. 

“Wisdom, power, charity 
Mould thy prosperity. 

Portage, our pride; 

Thy labors here give birth, 

To gifts for all the earth. 

Sounding the people’s worth 
Who here abide. 


BREAKING CAMP 


303 


^‘God bless our mighty men, 

Give each the strength of ten, 

Portage our pride; 

Preserve our liberty, 

Honor, integrity, 

Then shall praise be to Thee 
Great God, our Guide. 

^^And now,” continued the Colonel, when he 
had finished, “we shall have some music.” 

They went to the library, and there spent a 
merry evening with songs and stories. Anna 
was persuaded to play and the beautiful strains 
of the “Overture” from William Tell gave evi- 
dence of her skill. At midnight the Colonel bade 
his guests “Goodnight,” and the pleasant party 
came to an end. 

When Tom reached Joe’s attic retreat on 
Monday, he found Joe studying again over the 
parchment. 

“Tom, did it ever occur to you that we 
stopped digging when we found the box?” 

“Well, I never! Did you expect, to find a 
whole warehouse, Joe?” 

“Oh, I guess we found all there was. It 
looks pretty simple now, doesn’t it?” 

“Yes, and you’ll look simple, too, Joe, if you 
ever start digging around that tree for more 
boxes.” 


304 the young crusaders 

Joe put up his paper. He hesitated a mo- 
ment, and then seizing Tom, he exclaimed: 

“Sit right down here. I want to tell you my 
great idea.” 

But Joe’s great idea is another story. 



I 




1911 V 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




